0% found this document useful (0 votes)
369 views252 pages

FT Historian ProcessBook User Guide

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1/ 252

PROCESSBOOK USER GUIDE

Rockwell Automation Publication HSEPB-UM025A-EN-EDecember 2013


Supersedes Publication HSEPB-UM024A-EN-EJune 2012

Contacting Rockwell

Customer Support Telephone 1.440.646.3434


Online Support http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/overview.page

Copyright Notice

2013 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
This document and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are copyrighted by Rockwell Automation,
Inc. Any reproduction and/or distribution without prior written consent from Rockwell Automation, Inc. is
strictly prohibited. Please refer to the license agreement for details.

Trademark Notices

FactoryTalk, FactoryTalk Historian Machine Edition (ME), FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition (SE), FactoryTalk
Live Data, FactoryTalk Services Platform, FactoryTalk VantagePoint, FactoryTalk View, FactoryTalk ViewStudio,
Rockwell, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, RSView, RSView Machine Edition, RSView ME Station,
RSView Studio, and RSLinx Enterprise are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Any Rockwell Automation logo, software or hardware not mentioned herein is also a trademark, registered or
otherwise, of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
For a complete list of products and their respective trademarks, go to
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/legal-notices/overview.page?%23tab4#/tab4.

Other Trademarks

ActiveX, Microsoft, Microsoft Access, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual SourceSafe, Windows,
Windows ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows Server-, Windows XP, Windows 7, and Vista are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in
the United States and/or other countries.
ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International.
DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. (ODVA)
OLE for Process Control (OPC) is a registered trademark of the OPC Foundation.
Oracle, SQL*Net, and SQL*Plus are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.

Warranty

This product is warranted in accordance with the product license. The products performance may be affected
by system configuration, the application being performed, operator control, maintenance, and other related
factors. Rockwell Automation is not responsible for these intervening factors. The instructions in this
document do not cover all the details or variations in the equipment, procedure, or process described, nor do
they provide directions for meeting every possible contingency during installation, operation, or
maintenance. This products implementation may vary among users.
This document is current as of the time of release of the product; however, the accompanying software may
have changed since the release. Rockwell Automation, Inc. reserves the right to change any information
contained in this document or the software at any time without prior notice. It is your responsibility to obtain
the most current information available from Rockwell when installing or using this product.

Table of Contents
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 1
What's New ................................................................................................................................... 1
Whats New in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook ................................................................ 1
Historian ProcessBook Essentials ............................................................................................... 3
What Can You View with FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook ..................................................... 3
Start FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook ..................................................................................... 3
Servers and Connections ........................................................................................................ 3
Connect to a Historian Server ............................................................................................ 4
Historian Security
5
Network Errors .................................................................................................................... 5
Displays and Connection Failure ........................................................................................ 5
Node Identifiers for Multiple Historian Servers ................................................................... 6
Workspace ............................................................................................................................... 6
ProcessBook (.piw) ............................................................................................................. 6
Display ................................................................................................................................ 6
Create a New ProcessBook or Display .............................................................................. 7
Run Mode and Build Mode ...................................................................................................... 7
Add-Ins .......................................................................................................................................... 8
Load Add-ins ............................................................................................................................ 8
Menus and Toolbars ..................................................................................................................... 9
Command Menus .................................................................................................................... 9
Customize Toolbars ................................................................................................................. 9
Toolbar Buttons .....................................................................................................................10
Add Buttons to Toolbars ...................................................................................................10
Browser Toolbar ..........................................................................................................................10
Browse ProcessBooks and Displays .....................................................................................10
View Browsing History ...........................................................................................................11
Set a Home Page ..................................................................................................................11
Bookmarks and Browser History ...........................................................................................11
Bookmarks Tab.................................................................................................................12
History Tab .......................................................................................................................12
Add/Edit Bookmarks .........................................................................................................12
Keyboard Shortcuts ....................................................................................................................13
Assign a Keyboard Shortcut ..................................................................................................13
Remove a Keyboard Shortcut ...............................................................................................14
Preference Settings ....................................................................................................................14
General Preferences ..............................................................................................................15
Table of Contents Preferences ..............................................................................................16
Display Window .....................................................................................................................17
Trend Preferences .................................................................................................................19
Trend Elements Preferences .................................................................................................20
Print .............................................................................................................................................21
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

iii

Table of Contents

Page Setup for Printing..........................................................................................................22


Print Preview ..........................................................................................................................22
Setup Printer ..........................................................................................................................23
Change the Language Used for FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook ........................................23
About FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook .................................................................................23
Work with a ProcessBook ...........................................................................................................25
Basic Steps to Build a ProcessBook ...........................................................................................25
Create a New ProcessBook ........................................................................................................25
Add ProcessBook Entries ...........................................................................................................26
Create a Text or Display Entry ..............................................................................................27
Linked Display Entry ..............................................................................................................27
Create a Linked Display Entry ..........................................................................................28
Linked ProcessBook Entries ..................................................................................................29
Move Linked Entries .........................................................................................................29
Operating System Command Entry .......................................................................................29
Create an Operating System Command Entry .................................................................30
Working Directory for Operating System Commands ......................................................31
Arrange ProcessBook Entries .....................................................................................................31
Book View ..............................................................................................................................32
Turn Pages in Book View .................................................................................................33
Resize a ProcessBook .....................................................................................................33
Entries in Book View .........................................................................................................34
Change the Name of an Entry in Book View
34
Change the Level of an Entry in Book View
34
Outline View ...........................................................................................................................34
Collapse or Expand Outline View .....................................................................................35
Rearrange Entries in Outline View ...................................................................................36
Change the Name of an Entry in Outline View .................................................................36
Change the Level of an Entry in Outline View ..................................................................36
Copy and Paste an Entry .......................................................................................................36
Remove an Entry ...................................................................................................................37
Save and Close a ProcessBook ............................................................................................37
Open an Existing ProcessBook ..................................................................................................37
Work With Multiple ProcessBooks .........................................................................................38
Properties ....................................................................................................................................38
Summary Information in ProcessBook ..................................................................................38
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook File Properties ..............................................................39
Modify a ProcessBook Title ..............................................................................................40
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Display Properties ........................................................40
Import Files to a ProcessBook ....................................................................................................41
File Sharing Capability ................................................................................................................42
Move a ProcessBook to Another PC ..........................................................................................42
Work with a Display ......................................................................................................................45
Overview of Display Elements ....................................................................................................45
Static Symbols .......................................................................................................................45
Dynamic Symbols ..................................................................................................................45
Buttons ...................................................................................................................................46
OLE Objects ..........................................................................................................................46
Manage Displays and Independent Display Files .......................................................................46

iv

Open a Display ......................................................................................................................46


Open Several Displays at One Time ................................................................................47
Manage Multiple Open Displays .......................................................................................47
Open Independent Display Files ......................................................................................47
Zoom Display Size .................................................................................................................47
Use Full Screen Mode ...........................................................................................................48
Search for a Display ..............................................................................................................48
Reduce a Display to an Icon to Save Space .........................................................................49
Save a Display .......................................................................................................................49
Display Settings .....................................................................................................................50
Display Scrolling Properties ...................................................................................................51
Status Bar Indicators .............................................................................................................51
Drawing Tools .............................................................................................................................52
Organizing Symbols ...............................................................................................................52
Drawing Area .........................................................................................................................53
Drawing Grid ..........................................................................................................................53
Set Grid Size and Grid Snap ............................................................................................53
Formatting ...................................................................................................................................54
Editable Formatting Attributes ...............................................................................................54
Set Font .................................................................................................................................55
Set Line Color ........................................................................................................................55
Set Fill Color ..........................................................................................................................56
Set Background Color............................................................................................................56
Set Line Weight .....................................................................................................................57
Set Line Style .........................................................................................................................57
Set Line Ends ........................................................................................................................57
Set Formatting Paintbrush .....................................................................................................57
ToolTip Statistics .........................................................................................................................58
Time Range and Playback Toolbar ............................................................................................58
Scroll Options ........................................................................................................................61
Scroll Period ..........................................................................................................................62
Scroll Period Constraints ..................................................................................................62
Scroll Period Time Format ................................................................................................62
Change the Scroll Period ..................................................................................................62
Display Range .......................................................................................................................62
Change the Display Range ...............................................................................................62
Change Display Range Dialog box...................................................................................63
Move the Display Range During Playback .......................................................................63
Time Range Toolbar ...................................................................................................................64
Revert Time Range................................................................................................................64
Change the Time Range........................................................................................................64
Use the Scrolling Time Range ...............................................................................................65
Time Forward and Back.........................................................................................................66
Set Time Range for Future Trends ........................................................................................66
Layers within Displays ................................................................................................................66
Create Layers ........................................................................................................................67
Assign Symbols to Layers .....................................................................................................68
Layers and Composite Symbols ............................................................................................69
Active Layers Status Bar .......................................................................................................69
Migrating Displays to Another Historian Server ..........................................................................69
Visualize Data with Symbols .......................................................................................................71
Trends .........................................................................................................................................71
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

Table of Contents

Create a Trend .......................................................................................................................72


Build a Trend with Multiple Plots ......................................................................................74
Move a Plot .......................................................................................................................75
Delete a Plot within a Trend .............................................................................................75
Edit a Trend ...........................................................................................................................75
Define Trend Dialog box ........................................................................................................75
Display Format Tab ..........................................................................................................76
Trace Format Tab .............................................................................................................77
Layout Tab ........................................................................................................................78
Configure Trend Scale ...........................................................................................................79
Trend Analysis Tools .............................................................................................................80
Drag Zoom ........................................................................................................................80
Trend Zoom 2x In or Out ..................................................................................................80
Expand a Trend ................................................................................................................81
Trend Cursor.....................................................................................................................81
Add a Trend Cursor
81
Remove a Trend Cursor
82
Change Time Range..............................................................................................................82
How Trends Refresh ..............................................................................................................82
Trend Appearance .................................................................................................................83
Grid Lines and Labels .......................................................................................................83
Grid Lines
83
Grid Line Labels
83
Value Scale Grid Lines .....................................................................................................84
Autorange Scale
84
Database Scale
84
Logarithmic Scale
84
Manually Defined Scale
84
Single and Multiple Scales for the Vertical Axis ...............................................................84
Time Scale Grid Lines ......................................................................................................85
Traces ...............................................................................................................................86
Hide Traces
86
Markers .............................................................................................................................87
Actual Data Markers
87
Trace Markers
87
X Markers
87
Ad Hoc Trends .......................................................................................................................87
Create an Ad Hoc Trend ...................................................................................................88
Save an Ad Hoc Trend Display ........................................................................................88
OpenVMS Trends and Graphics ...........................................................................................89
Convert Trends .................................................................................................................89
Convert Graphics ..............................................................................................................89
XYPlots .......................................................................................................................................90
Draw an XYPlot .....................................................................................................................91
General Tab ......................................................................................................................92
Configure Pairings
93
Scale Box
94
Plot Time
95
Add a Data set to an XYPlot
95
Display Format Tab ..........................................................................................................96
Plot Format Tab ................................................................................................................97
Ad hoc XYPlots .................................................................................................................99
XYPlot Statistics ...............................................................................................................99
Linear Regression by Least Squares ..................................................................................101

vi

Correlation Coefficient .........................................................................................................101


Interpreting an XYPlot..........................................................................................................102
Point Properties
102
Scroll Feature
102
Plot Values
102
Zoom/Revert Functions .......................................................................................................103
Enlarge the whole plot to fill the display window ............................................................103
Enlarge a small area of the plot ......................................................................................103
Revert .............................................................................................................................104
Change Time Range Feature ..............................................................................................104
XYPlot Cursors ....................................................................................................................105
Move the XYCursor from Point to Point .........................................................................105
Bad Status Indicators ...........................................................................................................106
Out of Range Indicators .......................................................................................................106
Too Many Points ..................................................................................................................106
Examples of XYPlots ...........................................................................................................106
Example 1: Create an XYPlot on a display in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook to compare
values for two Historian tags ..........................................................................................106
Example 2: Compare different tags to help optimize equipment performance .............107
Example 3: Lab Comparisons .......................................................................................107
Example 4: Comparing a Batch Run to a Standard ......................................................107
Example 5: Comparing Two Time Ranges ....................................................................108
Additional Dynamic Symbols ....................................................................................................108
Values ..................................................................................................................................108
Add a Dynamic Value .....................................................................................................108
Button...................................................................................................................................110
Add a Button ...................................................................................................................111
Bars......................................................................................................................................112
Add a Dynamic Bar .........................................................................................................112
Bar Scales ......................................................................................................................114
Defaults
114
Compatibility
114
Tick Marks
115
Format Appearance
116
Multi-State Symbols ..................................................................................................................116
Create Dynamic Multi-State Symbols ..................................................................................117
Static Symbols ..........................................................................................................................118
Text Symbol .........................................................................................................................118
Add Text to a Display .....................................................................................................119
Edit a Text Box ...............................................................................................................119
Move a Text Block ..........................................................................................................119
Line Symbol .........................................................................................................................119
Draw a Line.....................................................................................................................120
Rectangle, Square, Arc, Ellipse, and Circle Symbol ...........................................................120
Draw a Rectangle, Square, Arc, Ellipse, or Circle ..........................................................120
Polygon Symbol ...................................................................................................................121
Draw a Polygon ..............................................................................................................121
Polyline Symbol ...................................................................................................................122
Draw a Polyline ...............................................................................................................122
Graphic Symbol ...................................................................................................................123
Add a Graphic .................................................................................................................123
Symbol Library .....................................................................................................................124
Add an Image from the Symbol Library ..........................................................................125
Configure Symbol Library Options
125

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

vii

Table of Contents

Symbol Properties ..........................................................................................................126


Work with Symbols.....................................................................................................................127
Details and Annotations ............................................................................................................127
Details Window ....................................................................................................................127
Open Details Window .....................................................................................................128
Historian Annotations Maintenance .....................................................................................129
Add Annotations .............................................................................................................129
Data Favorites ...........................................................................................................................130
Select a Default Symbol ......................................................................................................130
Search for Data Favorites ....................................................................................................130
Favorites Panel ....................................................................................................................131
Use Favorites ..................................................................................................................131
Import or Export Data Favorites .....................................................................................132
Drag Data Between FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook and Other Applications .........132
Select and Move a Symbol .......................................................................................................132
Select Multiple Symbols ............................................................................................................133
Rotate a Symbol .......................................................................................................................133
Flip a Symbol ............................................................................................................................134
Delete a Symbol ........................................................................................................................134
Stacking Order ..........................................................................................................................134
Move a Symbol Forward or Backward in the Stack .............................................................134
Align Multiple Symbols ..............................................................................................................135
Group, Ungroup, or Regroup symbols ......................................................................................136
Connectors ................................................................................................................................136
Connect Symbols .................................................................................................................136
Connection Points ................................................................................................................137
Add Connection Points ...................................................................................................138
Disconnect a Connection Point ......................................................................................138
Delete Connection Points ...............................................................................................138
Move Connection Points .................................................................................................138
Determine the Identifying Number of a Connection Point ..............................................139
Attach a Symbol to a Connector ..........................................................................................139
Attach a Symbol as an Adjunct to Another Symbol ........................................................140
Connectors Dialog box ........................................................................................................141
Configure the Flow of a Connector .................................................................................141
Configure Attachments to a Connector ..........................................................................142
Detect Connections and Attachments .................................................................................144
Reroute a Connector Path ...................................................................................................144
Item Definition ...........................................................................................................................144
Display or Change Item Definition .......................................................................................145
Status Report for Dynamic Symbols .........................................................................................145
Status Flags for Data ................................................................................................................146
FactoryTalk Historian System Data ..........................................................................................149
About FactoryTalk Historian data .............................................................................................149
Historian Time......................................................................................................................150
Historian Time Abbreviations
150
Historian Time Expressions
151
Historian Time String Examples
152
Time Syntax Examples ...................................................................................................152

viii

Time Interval Examples ..................................................................................................152


Historian Tags (Historian Points) ..............................................................................................153
Historian Server ...................................................................................................................153
Updates to FactoryTalk Historian data ................................................................................153
Historian Tag Search ...........................................................................................................153
View Point Attributes ............................................................................................................155
Historian Point Attributes ................................................................................................156
Historian Server Data Types ...............................................................................................157
Element Relative Display (ERD) ...............................................................................................158
Connect to an AF Database ................................................................................................158
Add Element Relative Data to a Dynamic Symbol ..............................................................159
AF Context Path ..................................................................................................................160
Change AF Element Context ...............................................................................................161
Data Sets ..................................................................................................................................162
Historian Calculation Data Sets ...........................................................................................163
Create a Historian Calculation Data Set .........................................................................164
Intervals and Time Value ................................................................................................166
Plot a Moving Average in a Trend ..................................................................................167
ODBC Data Sets ..................................................................................................................167
Create an ODBC Data Set .............................................................................................167
Custom Data Sets ................................................................................................................169
Placeholders ........................................................................................................................169
Processing of Placeholder Queries ................................................................................170
Historian tag Placeholder Queries ..................................................................................170
Design Placeholder Queries ...........................................................................................170
Add or Edit Placeholders ................................................................................................170
Verify a Data Set is in Use ...................................................................................................171
Data Set Details ...................................................................................................................172
Add a Data Set to a Trend ...................................................................................................172
Time Intervals for Plotting Tags and Data Sets ...................................................................174
Refresh a Trend Containing a Data Set ..............................................................................174
Add Data Sets to Bars or Values in a Display .....................................................................174
Run FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook When Data Sets Are Included ............................174
Edit a Data Set .....................................................................................................................175
Delete a Data Set ................................................................................................................176
Copy a Data Set to Another ProcessBook ..........................................................................176
Loading Custom Data Sets ..................................................................................................177
Configure a Symbol with an AF Attribute .............................................................................177
Configure the AF2.x Data Set ..............................................................................................178
ODBC ........................................................................................................................................179
ODBC Driver Manager .........................................................................................................179
ODBC Drivers ......................................................................................................................179
ODBC Data Sources ............................................................................................................179
ODBC Data Access .............................................................................................................179
ODBC Data Source Administrator .......................................................................................180
Prepare for ODBC ...............................................................................................................181
Configure the ODBC Data Source .......................................................................................181
Use MSQuery to Build Data Sets ........................................................................................182
Assumptions about Timestamps and Data Sets .................................................................182
Stored Procedures in Queries .............................................................................................182
Troubleshoot ODBC Data Sets ...........................................................................................183
Trace ODBC Calls ...............................................................................................................183
Initiate Call Tracing .........................................................................................................183
Delete an ODBC Driver .......................................................................................................184
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

ix

Table of Contents

Delete an ODBC Data Source .............................................................................................184


Edit an ODBC Data Source .................................................................................................184
Historian Notifications in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook .............................................185
Launch Historian Notifications ..................................................................................................185
About the Notifications Window ................................................................................................185
Receive Notifications ...........................................................................................................186
Filter Notifications ................................................................................................................187
Open Displays Associated with a Notification .....................................................................187
Work with Notifications ........................................................................................................187
Contacts Window ......................................................................................................................188
Open Contacts Window .......................................................................................................188
Notification Contacts ............................................................................................................188
MS Office Communicator Contacts .....................................................................................189
Filter MS Office Communicator Contacts .......................................................................189
Work with Contacts ..............................................................................................................189
Send an Instant Message to a Contact ..........................................................................190
Send Email to a Contact .................................................................................................190
Sort Contacts ..................................................................................................................190
View Contact Information ...............................................................................................190
Contacts Presence ..............................................................................................................190
Embedding and Linking .............................................................................................................191
Overview of Microsoft OLE Compound Documents .................................................................191
OLE Automation in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook ..........................................................191
Embedded Objects ...................................................................................................................192
Embed in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook ....................................................................192
Embed an Existing File in a Display ...............................................................................193
Embed a New File in a Display.......................................................................................193
Edit the Contents of an Embedded Object ..........................................................................194
Share ProcessBook Displays with Other Applications ........................................................194
Embed an Existing Display in Another OLE Application ................................................194
Embed a New Display in Another OLE Application ........................................................194
Linked Objects ..........................................................................................................................195
Link a File to a Display.........................................................................................................195
Dynamic and Manual Updates of a Linked Object ..............................................................196
Edit, Update, or Break Links ................................................................................................196
How Links Are Stored ..........................................................................................................196
Select a New Source Link....................................................................................................197
Edit the Contents of a Linked Object ...................................................................................197
Link a ProcessBook to Another Application.........................................................................197
Should You Link or Embed? .....................................................................................................198
Example of Embedded and Linked Objects in a ProcessBook Display ..............................198
Add an Active X Control ............................................................................................................198
Work with OLE Objects .............................................................................................................199
Icons vs. Graphics ...............................................................................................................199
Convert Objects to Icons ................................................................................................199
Windows Drag and Drop......................................................................................................201
Edit the Appearance of an OLE Object ...............................................................................201
Commands That Ignore OLE objects ..................................................................................201
Placement of OLE objects ...................................................................................................202

OLE Object Colors ...............................................................................................................202


Edit Contents of OLE objects ..............................................................................................202
Delete an OLE Object from a Display..................................................................................203
OLE Container/Server .........................................................................................................203
Visual Basic for Applications in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook ..................................205
VBA Commands .......................................................................................................................205
ActiveX Automation...................................................................................................................205
What You Can Do with ActiveX Automation in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook ...............206
Automation Vocabulary .............................................................................................................206
System Administrator Notes .....................................................................................................207
Installation and Upgrade ...........................................................................................................207
System Requirements .........................................................................................................207
Compatibility with Other FactoryTalk Historian System Client Products .............................207
High Availability Configuration Settings ....................................................................................207
Recommended Connection Preference Setting ..................................................................208
MDB to AF Migration.................................................................................................................209
Module Relative Display Add-in ...........................................................................................210
Considerations for Multiple-Versions of Historian Server or FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
.............................................................................................................................................210
Matrix of Display Behavior ...................................................................................................210
Migrate a Module Relative Display (MRD) to an Element Relative Display (ERD) .............211
Playback Toolbar Setting Defaults ............................................................................................212
DEP Security.............................................................................................................................213
Read/Write Data Access for Users ...........................................................................................213
Machine Address ......................................................................................................................214
PROCBOOK.INI ........................................................................................................................214
Startup Section ....................................................................................................................214
Startup Example .............................................................................................................217
ProcessBook View Section ..................................................................................................218
Conversion Section ..............................................................................................................218
Data Manager Section .........................................................................................................218
Trend Definition Section ......................................................................................................219
Colors Section .....................................................................................................................220
Time Range Scroll Section ..................................................................................................221
ProcessBook Level Section .................................................................................................221
Display Colors Section .........................................................................................................222
XYPlot Definition Section .....................................................................................................222
Macro Protection ..................................................................................................................223
View Only Mode ...................................................................................................................223
INI Security ..........................................................................................................................224
IMPPIGP.INI .............................................................................................................................224
SETUPProcessBook.LOG ........................................................................................................227
Troubleshooting Tips .................................................................................................................229
Display Can't Find Data ............................................................................................................229
Trend Cursor Does Not Appear ................................................................................................229
Trend Legend Does Not Appear ...............................................................................................229
Cant Change or Save a Display ...............................................................................................229

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

xi

Table of Contents

Is an XYPlot Updating? .............................................................................................................229


Is an OLE Object in a Display Linked or Embedded? ..............................................................230
Linked Object Data Isn't Updating ............................................................................................230
Missing ODBC Trace ................................................................................................................230
Missing ODBC Data Sources ...................................................................................................231
Index ............................................................................................................................................233

xii

Chapter 1

Introduction
As the easy-to-use graphical display interface to the FactoryTalk Historian System,
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook makes it possible to efficiently display real-time and
historical data residing in the FactoryTalk Historian System and other sources. Process
owners use FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook to create interactive graphical displays that
can be saved and shared with others. Users can quickly switch between run and build modes
to create dynamic, interactive displays and populate them with live data. They also can write
scripts that automate displays and trends by using Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications,
which is seamlessly integrated into FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. Rockwell
Automation also produces add-ins that perform Batch and other types of analyses.

What's New
Whats New in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook

Enhanced Support for Historian Asset FrameworkFactoryTalk Historian


ProcessBook no longer supports Module Relative Displays and removes the MRD add-in
when it is installed. Enhanced support for Historian Asset Framework (AF) includes
ToolTip statistics and support for AF data references in the Details window. You can still
download the MRD add-in from Tech Support if you need it.

Display EnhancementsThe Playback toolbar added for v3.2 is enhanced to provide


more time controls and synchronization across multiple displays for time range changes
only. The name of the toolbar is now Time Range and Playback toolbar to reflect the
enhanced functionality. The Bar symbol now has a scale option.

Enhanced Language SupportA Language Selection tool is added to the FactoryTalk


Historian ProcessBook preference page. This tool allows users to switch among
languages installed using the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook MUI Pack. This version
of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook has implemented Unicode and regionalization
enhancements.

VBA EnhancementsA newer version of Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) is


installed, which addresses some security issues. In addition, there is support for handling
UTC times through automation.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

Chapter 2

Historian ProcessBook Essentials


What Can You View with FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
A FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Display entry may contain FactoryTalk Historian
System data from any or all of the following sources:

Historian Servers

Historian Asset Framework (AF) Servers

Calculations from FactoryTalk Historian data

Databases with ODBC connectivity

Databases with custom interfaces to FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook

Spreadsheets, documents, schematics, graphics, photos, and other Windows applications


through OLE linking and embedding

VBA code

ProcessBook displays may be linked to other displays within the same ProcessBook, or to
displays in a separate ProcessBook. You can also include buttons that launch other
applications.

Start FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook


To begin using FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook you need to:
1. Launch the application.
2. Connect to a Historian Server (page 4).
3. Open a ProcessBook file (page 6) or display (page 6).

Servers and Connections


See the PI SDK Controls and Dialogs User Help to find comprehensive and up-to-date
information on connecting FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook to a Historian Server. You can
access this Help from the Help menu in the Connections dialog box (File > Connections).

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

Historian ProcessBook Essentials

Connect to a Historian Server


Use the Connection Manager dialog box to manage connections to Historian Servers

Click File > Connections. The Connection Manager dialog box appears. The dialog
box lists the configured servers to which you can connect. It also shows the server you
have chosen as the default server.

A selected checkbox next to a server name in the Connections dialog box indicates an open
connection to the Historian Server.

To manage connection settings:

Click to select a checkbox and open a connection to a Historian Server in the list. Clear a
checkbox to close a connection.

Select a Historian Server in the server pane to access connection settings.

Note: If you select more than one server, the application tries to connect to each server
using the same user ID and password. If it fails, a new PI Server Login dialog box
appears. If you already are logged in to the server from a different FactoryTalk
Historian application, such as FactoryTalk Historian DataLink, the application uses
the user ID and password with which you logged in. See the PI SDK Controls and
Dialogs User Help for more detail.

Start FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook

Historian Security
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is designed to support whatever Historian Security is
configured on the Historian Server.

When FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook attempts to connect to a Historian Server, the


application first attempts to pass your Windows log in credentials. The PI SDK will try to
use them directly or find a Trust for the user, domain, application or machine (per Trust
configurations).

If all attempts to login to the Historian Server using Windows credentials or other
machine-related information fail, then you must have a PI user account (not Windows
security-based). In this case, the PI SDK attempts to use the default PI user account
configured for the Server (you can see this in the Connections (page 4) dialog box in
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook).

If the default PI user account does not require a password, then you are automatically
logged in. If the default account does require a password, a login dialog box appears,
which expects the PI user account and password.

Note: For more detailed information on Historian Server security, see Configuring
FactoryTalk Historian SE Security, available on the FactoryTalk Historian SE
installation DVD. As of FactoryTalk Historian 3.0, the Historian Server can be
configured to take advantage of significantly enhanced security options.

Network Errors
Network Errors update the Status Report (page 145) dialog box, rather than displaying error
messages on your monitor. When a display is opened but the server is not available, only one
Select New Node (page 5) dialog box appears. The dialog box appears once for each server
that is not available.
Displays and Connection Failure
If the connection to your data is not successful, the display (page 6) is still drawn, but data in
dynamic elements are replaced with indicators signifying that no data is available.

Trends are labeled Invalid and no information is plotted.

Values are replaced with pound signs (###) and the message Disconnected appears.

Bar graphs are drawn using hash marks (//////).

Multi-State symbols show the configured color for bad data.

If a server has been disconnected, and/or cannot be reached, the Select New Node dialog box
appears.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

Historian ProcessBook Essentials

Click Connections to launch the PI Connection Manager dialog box. From there you can
choose a new server from the drop-down list of connected servers.
Node Identifiers for Multiple Historian Servers
A Node Identifier is stored with each tag name used in a display to point to the correct server.
If you define Historian Server nodes in the PI Connection Manager dialog box, the
identifiers are the same on each PC on the network as long as the node names for the
FactoryTalk Historian System are the same.

Workspace
When you start FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, it appears as an open window or
workspace on the desktop. Depending on your settings, you may initially see an empty
workspace, or an open ProcessBook in either Book (page 32) or Outline (page 34) view.
Within the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook workspace you can open a ProcessBook or
independent display.
ProcessBook (.piw)
In FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook a ProcessBook is the container for the information and
analysis of the process you are monitoring. A ProcessBook may appear as either a tabbed
book - Book view (page 32), or an outline - Outline view (page 34), and is saved as a separate
file with a .piw extension.
A ProcessBook is a collection of individual displays of data and analysis. Use a ProcessBook
to organize data from the FactoryTalk Historian System and other sources so that you can
analyze the processes you monitor or the tasks you perform.
A ProcessBook and its displays are stored in a single file.
Display
The main unit for creating presentations of data in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is the
display. A display may stand on its own (.pdi or.svg), or it may be part of a ProcessBook
(.piw). A display contains all the symbols used to represent an operational environment
6

Start FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook

using real-time, production data from Historian as well as data from other sources. In addition
to containing this collection of data elements, the display has its own set of features and
properties that affect the collection of data elements.
Displays can show a variety of elements, such as a schematic representation of a production
line, a plot of readings taken from a production line, or a comparison of lab data and batch
specifications. Displays can also be linked to other ProcessBooks, displays in other
ProcessBooks, or other applications.
Create a New ProcessBook or Display
Use the New dialog box to create a new ProcessBook (page 25), add ProcessBook entries
(page 26), or create an independent display (page 46).
Click File > New to launch the New dialog box,

Run Mode and Build Mode


When you work with a ProcessBook or an independent display, you work in one of two
operating modes, Run mode or Build mode.

Build modemost of the functions that you use when you create or modify a
ProcessBook require the Build mode pointer. Use Build mode to add, remove, or move
symbols on a display, to add, remove, or organize entries in a ProcessBook, and for
access to symbol definitions and formatting tools.

Run mode is used to open entries and execute commands once a ProcessBook is
built. You can make some changes to a display while in Run mode; however, working in
Run mode keeps you from accidentally making permanent changes to items in a display.

You switch between modes by clicking the Run mode pointer

or the Build mode pointer

, which are located on the Tools menu and the Drawing toolbar. Your preferred mode of
operation is set as a default in your Preference settings.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

Historian ProcessBook Essentials

Note: You can choose Build or Run mode as your preferred mode of operation by
clearing or selecting the Prefer Run Mode checkbox in the General tab (page 15)
of the ProcessBook Preferences dialog box. This is a helpful preference if you
spend most of your time building or editing displays.

Add-Ins
By default, FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook installs with the following add-in
components. You can load or unload these and other add-in components by using the Add-In
Manager (page 8).

AF 2.x Data Set

Browser toolbar (page 10)

Data Favorites (page 130)

Details (page 127)

Element Relative Displays (ERD) (page 158)

Historian Notifications Viewer (page 185)

ProcessBook SVG File Converterenables you to save displays as SVG files.

Time Range and Playback toolbar (page 58)

ToolTip Statistics (page 58)

You can install other add-ins with FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, but they don't become
available until you add additional applications:

FactoryTalk Historian BatchView

Load Add-ins
The Add-In Manager lists the Add-Ins available in your FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
installation. Use this dialog box to control whether the add-ins are loaded whenever you use
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.
1. Click Tools > Add-in Manager. The Add-In Manager dialog box appears.
2. Click an available add-in from the Available Add-Ins list.
3. A description of what the add-in does appears in the Description box.
4. Under Load Behavior, select the appropriate check boxes:

Loaded/UnloadedLoads or unloads the selected add-in. The add-in's current status


appears in the Load Behavior column at the top.
Load on StartupLoads the selected add-in on startup of FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook. The add-in's current status appears in the Load Behavior column at the
top.

Menus and Toolbars

Command LineLoads the selected add-in when FactoryTalk Historian


ProcessBook is started from the command prompt or from a script.

5. Click OK to complete the action and close the dialog box.


Note: If the add-in is unloaded and then reloaded, you must click the Revert toolbar
button

to re-synchronize any symbols using the add-in.

Menus and Toolbars


Command Menus
The active components of menu bars change depending on the active window and current
selections. There are five different collections of menu commands.
Menu Bar

Function

Default

Displays when no documents are active

Book

Displays when a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook


workbook is active

Display

Displays when a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook


Display document is active

View-Only Book

Displays when FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is


running in no-edit mode and a FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook workbook is active.

View-Only Display

Displays when FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is


running in no-edit mode and a display or workbook
document is active.

Customize Toolbars
Toolbars may be displayed or omitted as follows:
1. Click View > Toolbars. The Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box opens.
2. Check the toolbars you wish to display, and click OK.
Note: Click the Commands tab to see what buttons appear on each toolbar.

3. To move a toolbar, click on the double vertical bar at the left end and drag to the new
location. If the toolbar has no move handle, click on the title bar instead.
4. To reshape a floating toolbar (one without move handles), grab one of its edges and drag
to a new shape.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

Historian ProcessBook Essentials

Toolbar Buttons
Many of the menu commands in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook can be selected by
clicking a button on a toolbar. To determine the use of a button on a toolbar, hover the mouse
pointer over the button to display a ToolTip.
You can configure toolbars to display as view-only to omit unnecessary buttons. View-only
toolbars and others can be specified in procbook.ini (page 214).

Add Buttons to Toolbars


You can change the icons that appear on the toolbars or create your own custom toolbar.
1. Click View > Toolbars.
2. From the Commands tab of the Toolbars dialog box, you can select a particular toolbar
in the dialog box and drag buttons to existing toolbars in your FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook window.
3. While the Commands tab is open, you can also drag buttons off of a toolbar to remove
them from your window.

Browser Toolbar

The Browser add-in provides a toolbar that resembles the controls of a typical web browser.
The toolbar is automatically loaded when you install FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, and
allows you to navigate recently-used ProcessBooks and displays.

Browse ProcessBooks and Displays


1. Click View > Toolbars.
2. In the Toolbars list, make sure the Browser Toolbar and Time Range and Playback
Toolbar are selected.
Note: These toolbars are open by default when you first launch FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook.

3. From the Browser toolbar (page 10), click either the Forward or Back buttons
to view previously opened ProcessBooks or displays. Only displays opened during the
current session of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook are included in this navigation.
You can also use the Address box to open ProcessBooks and displays.
1. Click the arrow to the right of the Address box to see the last ten valid file paths you
entered. The last entry in the list is Browse.

10

Browser Toolbar

2. Click Browse to launch an Open File dialog box where you can browse for a file. You
can also enter a URL to open a file.

View Browsing History


1. Click the small black arrow to the right of the Back or Forward buttons
to see
a drop-down box that lists the last ten ProcessBooks and/or displays that you visited
during the current session.
2. Click an entry to return to that item.
The final entry in the list is History. Click History to open the History tab (page 12) of
the Organizer window (page 11) from where you can find an alphabetical list of all
ProcessBooks and displays visited during the current session

Set a Home Page


The Home Page is the startup file that is defined in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
preferences. It can be a .pdi (display), .piw (ProcessBook), or a display entry.
1. On the Browser toolbar (page 10), click the small arrow next to the Home button

2. From the drop-down menu, select one of the following:

Use Default to make PIDemo.piw your default file


Use Current to set the start file to the current, active ProcessBook or display

Bookmarks and Browser History


The Organizer is a docking window that allows you to organize and use bookmarks and the
current session's history. By default this window is hidden. Click the Bookmarks button on
the Browser toolbar (page 10) to make it appear.

The Organizer window has two tabs:


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

11

Historian ProcessBook Essentials

Bookmarks Tab
New bookmarks are automatically added to the root level of the bookmarks tree. You can
organize the entries into a hierarchical tree structure by dragging and dropping entries. Rightclick the Bookmarks tab to select one of the following from the context menu:

New Folder inserts a new folder at the top level of the tree or as a subfolder of a selected
folder.

Rename makes the entry name of the selected entry editable.

Edit opens a dialog box where you can enter a new name and file path for the selected
bookmark.

Select All selects every entry.

Deselect All clears every entry.

Send To File opens a Save File dialog box for the location to store the list of bookmarks.
Bookmarks are saved as XML and can be subsequently imported. Only files/folders that
are selected (checked) in the tree are exported.

Send To E-Mail opens a pre-populated Outlook email with the selected bookmarks ready
to be sent as an attachment with the same format as the Send to File option. Only
files/folders that are selected (checked) in the tree are exported.
Note: The Send To options are only visible if at least one entry is checked or when
right-clicking an item.

Import opens an Open File dialog box where you can select a bookmarks file to import.

History Tab
The History tab contains an alphabetical list of all ProcessBooks and displays you have
visited during the current session. From there you can click an entry to return to that item.
The icon of the entry indicates its file type. Hover over an entry to see its full path in a
ToolTip.
Add/Edit Bookmarks
1. On the Browser toolbar (page 10) click the Bookmark button
Bookmark tab of the Organizer (page 11) window.

to open the

From there you can browse, modify, or delete stored file locations.
2. Click
3. Click

to add a bookmark.
to edit a bookmark.

If the active file is already bookmarked, the same icon appears as the Edit Bookmark icon.
Click this button to edit the bookmark's label and file path.

12

Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard Shortcuts
A keyboard shortcut is a combination of keystrokes to use for frequent actions. Several of
these are already assigned in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. They appear to the right of
the corresponding menu command on the drop-down menus.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook lets you assign new combinations of keystrokes or
change existing ones.
For example you can:

Assign a keyboard shortcut for inserting symbols with one command.

Assign more than one keyboard shortcut to a specific action.

Change an existing shortcut, such as Ctrl+S, to another sequence you prefer.

Assign a Keyboard Shortcut


1. Click View > Assign Shortcuts.
The Shortcut Keys dialog box appears.

2. Under Select a macro, click the appropriate macro (menu item). The description for that
item and its assigned shortcuts, if any, appears.
3. Click the Create Shortcut button.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

13

Historian ProcessBook Essentials

The Assign Shortcut dialog box appears.


4. In the Press new shortcut key box, type the key you wish to use for the shortcut.
Note: If you choose a combination already in use, the current assignment appears
in the dialog box. If you click OK, the previous assignment is voided.

5. Click OK.
The new shortcut appears in the Assigned shortcuts box.
Note: If you want to reset all the keyboard shortcuts to their original positions when
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook was installed, click the Reset All button,
and then the OK button.

Remove a Keyboard Shortcut


1. In the Shortcut Keys dialog box, under the Select a macro list, select the appropriate
macro (menu item command). The description for that item and its assigned shortcuts, if
any, appears.
2. Under Assigned shortcuts, select the shortcut you want to remove, and then click the
Remove button.
3. Click OK.

Preference Settings
You can reach the ProcessBook Preferences dialog box by clicking Tools > Preferences.
Preference settings determine how the ProcessBook entries look, what colors are available
when you draw, and whether your ProcessBook opens in Book View (page 32) or Outline
View (page 34).
Note: Preference settings are stored in the file procbook.ini. Before you change the
Preference settings, consider creating a back-up copy of procbook.ini so that
you can restore FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook to the original settings.

14

Preference Settings

General Preferences
Click Tools > Preferences > General tab to configure application-wide settings. These
settings are stored in and retrieved from the [STARTUP] section of your procbook.ini
(page 214) file.

AuthorDetermines the name used as the creator of new files and the person who last edited
the file. See Summary Information in ProcessBook (page 38) for more information. This field
is blank by default when FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is first installed on a computer.
Startup FileThe file name and path in this field determine which, if any, file is
automatically opened when the application is launched. The default value when FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook is first installed is <installation
path>\procbook\pidemo.piw.
Library FileThe file name and path in this field determine which, if any, file is opened
when the original symbol library command is used. The default value when FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook is first installed is <installation
path>\procbook\symlibry.piw.
Prefer Run ModeDetermines whether ProcessBook starts up in Run mode or Build mode
by default. By default, this option is enabled when FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is first
installed on a computer.
Create Backup FilesDetermines whether backup files (with a .bak extension) are
automatically created when a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook file is opened. By default,

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

15

Historian ProcessBook Essentials

this option is turned off when FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is first installed on a
computer.
Keep snapshot values on updating plotsDetermines whether the archive event pipe is
used for updating trends, discarding any snapshot values between stored, archive values. This
setting is stored as PB2TraceCompatibility in the [STARTUP] section of your
procbook.ini. By default, this option is turned off when FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook is first installed on a computer.
Date and Time FormatSettings in this area determine how time is displayed in
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. Previews of each format are shown to help you select
the desired option.

The Use local Windows format option uses the current Regional Options settings in the
Windows Control Panel on the client machine to determine how dates and times are
displayed. Dates are shown using the currently configured Short Date format and Times
are shown using the current time format settings.

The Use PI Time Format option displays timestamps in the default Historian format of
dd-mmm-yy HH:mm:ss.ssss, where dd is the day of the month, mmm is a the short
text abbreviation of the month name (e.g., Jan for January), yy is the two digit year, HH is
the hour in 24-hour format, mm is the minute and ss.sss is the second, including subseconds, if present.

Default Time ZoneDetermines whether timestamps reflect the time zone of the Historian
Server used to retrieve data (PI Server time zone), or the time zone of the local computer
(Client machine time zone), when a new display is created. By default, the Historian Server
option is selected when FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is first installed on a computer.
This setting can also be changed and is stored with each display.

Table of Contents Preferences


Click Tools > Preferences > Table of Contents tab to configure the default view of Table of
Contents windows for ProcessBook(PIW) files, as well as the font applied to each level of
entry in those files. These settings are stored in and retrieved from your procbook.ini
(page 214) file.

16

Preference Settings

Default ViewSettings in this area determine how ProcessBook entries are displayed by
default. The default is Book view.
Font SettingsThe controls in this area determine the font settings applied to each entry
level in a ProcessBook. The font settings control the display of entry names in Table of
Contents windows.

The Entry level field allows you to select the level to configure. You can only select one
level at a time.

The Font field lists all the fonts installed on the computer running FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook.

The Size field determines the size of the text. The first time ProcessBook is installed, the
current Windows system font determines the default font settings to use.

The Font style group determines whether text is shown in bold or italic.

PreviewThis read-only field displays font settings for each level in a ProcessBook. Each of
the 10 possible entry levels is listed and displayed with its current font name, and style
settings.

Display Window
Click Tools > Preferences > Display Window tab to set options that apply to display
windows. These settings are stored in and retrieved from your procbook.ini (page 214)
file.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

17

Historian ProcessBook Essentials

Preserve Aspect Ratio on resizeDetermines whether display element sizes change in


proportion to the window size when a window is resized. When the check box is selected, the
aspect ratio is preserved and the display element sizes change in proportion to the window
size.
Show Symbol ToolTipsDetermines whether ToolTips are displayed on display symbols.
ToolTips appear for toolbar buttons regardless of this setting's value. By default, this option is
turned on when FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is first installed on a computer.
Show Value AttributesDetermines whether icons are displayed for Value Attribute flags
(Questionable, Substituted or Annotated) on FactoryTalk Historian data. This option is turned
on when FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is first installed on a computer.
Run mode scrollingDetermines the scroll bar behavior of display windows in Run mode.
Build mode scrollingDetermines the scroll bar behavior of display windows in Build
mode.
On

Display contains scroll bars all the time.

Off

Scroll bars never appear.

Automatic

Scroll bars appear when needed (this is the default setting).

Color PaletteThese fields present the 16 colors selected for use throughout the application
as the basic colors for the color well control.

18

Use the Modify button to launch the Color dialog box, where you can select additional
colors.

Preference Settings

Use the Reset button to return the Color Palette to system default values.

Default Display Background ColorDetermines the default color used for new displays.
The color well control is used to select a color. This color is also set when the Background
color of the current display is changed.
Symbol Defaultscontains fields to set the default formatting values for new symbols.
These defaults are also changed when the Formatting controls are used and no symbols are
selected.

Trend Preferences
Click Tools > Preferences > Trend tab to set default settings for new trend symbols. These
settings also apply to instant trends.

DisplayCheck or uncheck these options to configure what information a trend displays by


default.

AutoScaleSelect this check box if you want trends to be scaled as tag values change
over time. If you do not select this check box, then trends use the Database scale for each
tag.

Plot TitleSelect this check box if you want a title to display.

Vert. Scale Ins. Axis(Vertical Scale Inside Axis)Select this check box to display the
numeric scale inside the axis. If you do not select this check box the scale displays

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

19

Historian ProcessBook Essentials

outside the axis. Note that the value scale is drawn horizontally when the trend
orientation is vertical.

GridsSelect to display grid lines (page 83).

Multiple Scales (page 84)Add a value scale for each data point when selected. When
the check box is cleared, only a single value scale appears.

MarkersSelect the Markers check box if you want markers to indicate data points on
the trend. If you do not select the Markers check box three markers display on each line.
These markers help you match a line to a tag.

LegendSelect or clear these options to configure what information appears in the trend
legends. The information that can fit in the legend is determined by the size of the trend.
Consequently, not all of the information in the legend may be visible:

If the width of the legend is more than the width of the trend the legend does not appear.

If the height of the text in the legend is longer than the total height of the trend, items are
removed in this order: engineering units, tag name, then value.

Options include:

Tag Name

Server Name (for Historian tags)

Value

Description

Eng Units

SampleUse this display area to view a preview of selected trend preferences.

Trend Elements Preferences


Click Tools > Preferences > Trend Elements tab to set what colors, line styles, etc. are used
in individual traces gridlines, text, or the background. These settings also apply to instant
trends.

20

Print

Multi-State on Ad HocSelect this check box to include data from multi-stated


symbols when creating an ad hoc (instant) trend. When this option is cleared, data from a
multi-state configuration is not included on instant trends.

Traces per Ad Hoc TrendSelect the number of traces to have per plot on an ad hoc
(instant) trend. The default is 3, the maximum is 8. Once this number is reached,
additional plots are created to show the remaining tags selected for the instant trend.

Plot ElementsUse the drop down list to select from pens, text, grids, and background.
For each plot element, select a Marker Type, Line Style, Line Weight, and Color.
Note: You may select one of several line styles for each trace. You can also specify the
line thickness. Select none to omit a grid line.

SampleSee your changes previewed in the Sample area at the bottom of the dialog box.

Print

When you print from a ProcessBook, you can:

In Outline view, print a list of the ProcessBook contents or selected displays.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

21

Historian ProcessBook Essentials

In Book view, print a list of the entire book or a selected tab section.

Print the entire contents of a display or selected items from that window.

You can also set various printing options, such as the number of copies.
Each topic in the help file may be printed separately or you can print them all at once.
The Print command is accessible from the File menu, CTRL+P, or the print button. You can
print the contents of the active window or if you select items within a display before you open
the Print dialog box, then you can choose to print only those items.
Note: On a non-color printer, symbols are printed in shades of gray, but trends are
printed in black and white.
On some printers, when you print a trend with cursors, the value and time stamp
boxes of the cursor does not hide the information beneath them. However, other
trend cursors and the trend time scale may show through the trend cursor boxes,
making the values hard to read.

Page Setup for Printing


You can select the particular printer, the orientation of the paper, the paper size, and the
source within the printer of the paper. Use the Properties button to fine-tune the quality of
output or the performance of the printer.
The settings you choose in Page Setup become the defaults for all your printing.
Note: FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook supports dot matrix, HP PCL (LaserJet),
Postscript, and color printers. However, all Windows print drivers may not be
compatible. If you are not sure if your printer is supported or you observe any
printing problems, contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support
(http://support.rockwellautomation.com).

Print Preview

Print Preview displays your selection as it will look when it is printed. Note that the Print
Preview shows colors even though you may be using a black and white printer.
Once you select the item you want to preview, click File > Print Preview. Zoom in or out of
the selection by clicking on the selection with the magnifier cursor or by clicking the Zoom
buttons. To print the selection, click the Print button.

22

Change the Language Used for FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook

Setup Printer
Select Print Setup to choose a printer, page orientation, and paper size. In addition, you can
fine-tune the quality of output or the performance of your printer. The settings you choose in
Print Setup become the defaults for all your printing.
1. Click File > Page Setup. The Print Setup dialog box appears.
2. Select the printer, orientation, and paper size and source.
Note: FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook supports dot matrix, HP PCL (LaserJet),
Postscript, and color printers. However, all Windows print drivers may not be
compatible. If you are not sure if your printer is supported or you observe any
printing problems, contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support.

3. Click the Properties button to select printer-specific options. Refer to your printer
documentation for additional information about these options.

Change the Language Used for FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook


You can change the language for the application on your machine if you have a FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook Language Pack and the desired language resources installed. The
language setting is per user locale, so if others want to use the application on the same
machine under a different login, they can use different language resources if available.
To change the application language:
1. Run the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Language Pack and select the language
resources you want to install, if they are not already available.
2. Click Tools > Preferences. The ProcessBook Preferences dialog box appears.
3. On the General tab click the Language Settings button to launch the language selection
tool. This button is only active if you have language resources installed.
4. Select the target language and click OK.
5. Quit and restart the application.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook now appears in the specified language. Note that users
who log in with the same account see the same language, but the language does not change
for those logging in to the machine with different accounts.

About FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook


You can launch the About FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook dialog box by clicking
Help > About FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. The dialog box provides detailed
version and build information, as well as a link to the Rockwell Automation site
(http://www.rockwellautomation.com/).

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

23

Historian ProcessBook Essentials

24

Click Copy Info to copy the contents of the list to your Windows clipboard where it can
be pasted into a spreadsheet or text editor. This can be useful to share with Rockwell
Automation Technical Support engineers if you have a problem.

Click System Info to launch the Microsoft System Information dialog box. This
information can also be useful when troubleshooting issues through Technical Support.

Chapter 3

Work with a ProcessBook


Basic Steps to Build a ProcessBook
There are five basic steps to creating a ProcessBook (page 25):
1. Create and save a ProcessBook.
2. Add, organize, and edit entry titles.
3. Design a detailed display for each display entry title, using the drawing tools to create
schematics or other drawings with trends, bars, and values. To import outside data, add
OLE objects and values from data set queries.
4. Format trends and make other adjustments to each display to present your data in the
most useful manner.
5. Save the completed ProcessBook and install it wherever it is needed.
Note: In some installations, the System Administrator may set your FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook to View Only (page 223) mode. If so, you cannot create and save
new ProcessBooks.

Create a New ProcessBook


Before you create a ProcessBook, you should consider planning an organizational structure
and a naming convention for the ProcessBook and the entries within it.
When you create and save a new ProcessBook, the application initially gives it the title
Book1, where 1 represents the number of ProcessBooks created during the current session.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook also creates a file name for the new ProcessBook. It
suggests the first word from your title and an extension of .piw. For example, FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook may suggest Filtrat1.PIW. If you plan to build an entire set of
ProcessBooks, you might choose to modify it in Windows Explorer to sort your set of
ProcessBooks in some meaningful order, such as 05FiltrP.PIW.
1. In Build mode, click File > New. The New dialog box appears.
2. Select ProcessBook (.piw) File.
3. In the ProcessBook Name box, type a name for the new book.
4. Click OK.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

25

Work with a ProcessBook

5. A new ProcessBook appears.


Note: If you typed a name in the ProcessBook Name box, then the name appears on
the ProcessBook title bar. If you did not type a name, then the default title Book1
appears on the title bar.

Add ProcessBook Entries


After creating a ProcessBook, the next step is to add individual entries. By arranging and
combining displays and other entry types, you can create a complete working environment
for plant personnel.
Note: You can add entry titles to a ProcessBook and then complete the detailed design
of the entries later.

There are five specific types of entries:

Text (page 27)provides headings or static information

Display (page 27)opens a display

Linked displays (page 27)links to an independent display file

Linked ProcessBook (page 29)links to an entry in another ProcessBook

Operating system command (page 29)opens another application

When you add entries to a ProcessBook in either Outline or Book View, the entries are
arranged hierarchically. Subentries are indented under main entries. The name you give each
new entry is the name that shows in the ProcessBook.
When you create a new entry, it is placed in the ProcessBook just before the selected entry. If
no entries are selected, the new entry appears at the end of the current tab section in Book
View or at the end of the Outline View.
The first entry on a book tab is normally a Level 2 item (Level 1 is used as the tab label). All
Level 3 through 10 items are listed below a level 2 item and indented the same. In Outline
View, all levels are indented according to their level.

26

Add ProcessBook Entries

Create a Text or Display Entry


Use text entries to add labels and clarify text in a ProcessBook table of contents. Display
entries represent a display in a ProcessBook.
1. Click File > New. The New dialog box appears.
2. Under Type, select ProcessBook Entry.
3. Click OK.
4. The Define ProcessBook Entry dialog box appears.
5. In the Label dialog box, type a name.
Note: The label must be 244 characters or less in length.

6. For the Type, select Text or Display.


7. In the Level list, click the level at which you want to position the entry in the
ProcessBook hierarchy of entries, or
Type a number between 1 and 10.
Note: If you are creating the first entry in the ProcessBook, the level is automatically
set to 1 and cannot be changed. This entry is used as the first tab label.

8. Click OK. The entry is added to the ProcessBook. If the entry is at Level 1 and you are in
Book view, a tab is created using the name of the entry.
9. Click the Save button on the toolbar, or
Click File > Save.

Linked Display Entry


A linked display allows you to use a display name to link to an entry elsewhere in the
ProcessBook or in another ProcessBook or independent display file. This means that you
create and store only one copy of the display.
You can then access the same entry from several different locations in one ProcessBook. Or,
while you are in one ProcessBook, you can open an entry from another one without having to
close the first ProcessBook.
The linked entry is not a copy; it is a way of opening the original, similar to using a Windows
shortcut. The Book View or Outline View shows the title of the linked entry, but the actual
display window shows the title of the original entry.
If you edit the original from any linked entry, the original is updated and automatically
appears updated in all the ProcessBooks that are linked to it.
To prevent unexpected updates, you can restrict access to an entry so that only the original
entry can be edited and all others to which it is linked are read-only. If the entry resides on a
server, you can write-protect the file on the server. If you need more information on
restricting access to files, see your System Administrator.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

27

Work with a ProcessBook

Before you create a link to an original entry in a different ProcessBook, the ProcessBook that
contains the original (target) entry must be open. Once the link is established, you only need
to open the ProcessBook with the Linked Entry.
If you want to link to an entry in a second ProcessBook, open the second book or use the
Display Search dialog box. If you want to link to an entry in the current ProcessBook, create
the original display entry first, save the file, and then create the linked entry. The target
display must be in a file that has been saved so that its path can be determined.
Create a Linked Display Entry
1. Click File > New. The New dialog box appears.
2. Under Type, select ProcessBook Entry.
3. Click OK.
4. The Define ProcessBook Entry dialog box appears.
5. In the Label dialog box, type a name.
Note: The label must be 244 characters or less in length.

6. For the Type, select Link/OS Command.


7. Click the Browse button, or
Click the Browse arrow to see more search options.
The Open dialog box appears.
8. To link to an independent display file, locate and select the display file (.pdi) to which
you want to link and then click the Open button. The display name appears in the Action
box.
9. To link to another ProcessBook, locate and select the processbook file (.piw) to which
you want to link and click the Open button. The file name appears in the Action box.
10. To link to a display in a ProcessBook, select the Display Search option from the Browse
drop-down and enter criteria to locate the display you want within the open files. If the
display you want is not in a file that is open, select a different option in the Look in field.
When the display is listed in the Display Search dialog box, select it and click OK. The
name appears in the Action box.
11. In the Level list, click the level at which you want to position the entry in the
ProcessBook hierarchy of entries, or
Type a number between 1 and 10.
Note: If you are creating the first entry in the ProcessBook, the level is automatically
set to 1 and cannot be changed.

12. Clear the Options check box if you want the absolute path to the file checked first.

28

Add ProcessBook Entries

Note: By default, ProcessBook attempts to open a linked display from its relative
path first. If the relative path fails, then the absolute path is checked. Clearing
the Use relative path check box reverses the order in which the paths are
resolved. For new displays, this option is checked by default.

13. Click OK. A linked display entry icon is added to the outline and book view of the
ProcessBook you are developing.
14. Click the Save button.
Note: If you need to move the original entry to another directory or ProcessBook,
you must redefine the link between the ProcessBooks. If you move both the
original and the linked item and the relationship between the two file paths is
unchanged, you do not need to relink.

Linked ProcessBook Entries


Similar to a Linked Display, a Linked ProcessBook entry is a link to a different ProcessBook.
When you open a linked ProcessBook entry, another ProcessBook is opened. You may open
any of the entries in that ProcessBook. Using a Linked ProcessBook entry is the same as
opening a ProcessBook using the Open command on the File menu.
The same rules apply to Linked ProcessBook entries as to Linked entries.
Move Linked Entries
If you move a linked pair of displays or ProcessBooks to another location and if this move
changes the relationship of the two file paths, you need to relink the items.

Operating System Command Entry


An operating system command is used to start another application, such as Microsoft Excel,
in addition to FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. Essentially, any command that you can
execute with the Windows Run command can be used as an Operating System Command
entry in a ProcessBook.
For example, you can use an operating system command to link to FactoryTalk Historian
DataLink reports or calculations. You can also create links to CAD drawings, modeling
packages, or statistics packages. Links to displays saved as SVG files are treated as Operating
System Command entries.
When you have reports created on a different system, you can convert them to ASCII and,
using an operating system command, create a link to Notepad to read the reports.
If your company has online Help files for certain procedures, you can create a link to those
help files or other documents.
Your computer must have enough memory to run the applications you want to use in addition
to FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. The applications also must be installed on your
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

29

Work with a ProcessBook

system. If you do not know whether or not your computer has enough memory, contact your
System Administrator.
Create an Operating System Command Entry
1. Click File > New. The New dialog box appears.
2. Under Type, select ProcessBook Entry.
3. Click OK.
4. The Define ProcessBook Entry dialog box appears.
5. In the Label dialog box, type a name.
Note: The label must be 244 characters or less in length.

6. For the Type, select Link/OS Command.


7. Click the Browse button to the right of the Action box, or
Click the Browse arrow and then click Applications.
The Open dialog box appears.
8. Browse and locate the file to which want to link, and then click the Open button. The
application's path/name is displayed in the Action box.
Note: If you know the name of the .exe file for the application, such as
C:\excel\Excel.exe for Excel or the path and name of a data file, such as
C:\document\report.xls, then you can type the path directly in the
Action box. You can use most commands that execute successfully in the
Windows Start menu Run dialog box.

9. If you need to specify the location of the executable for the application, click the Browse
button to the right of the Working folder box. The Browse for Folder dialog box
appears.
10. Locate and select the folder that you want to specify for this operating system command,
and click OK.
Note: If you know the name of the working folder for this application, then you can
type it directly in the Working folder box.

11. In the Level list, click the level at which you want to position the entry in the
ProcessBook hierarchy of entries, or
Type a number between 1 and 10.
Note: If you are creating the first entry in the ProcessBook, the level is automatically
set to 1 and cannot be changed.

30

Arrange ProcessBook Entries

12. If the file specified in the Action box is associated with one application and you want to
open it with another, select the Ignore the default shell command for recognized file
types check box. This option is normally only used with files such as displays saved as
SVG so that they can be opened in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook instead of the
associated Viewer application.
Note: If the file type is supported by ProcessBook (either natively or through an addin), then it is opened directly when this option is selected for a Link or OS
command entry. For example, an .svg file is opened using the .svg File
Converter in ProcessBook, even if you have Adobe SVG Viewer installed.
Clearing this check box disables this behavior, so the default shell command
is used to open the file instead.

13. Click OK. An icon for the program you are launching is added to the outline and book
view of the ProcessBook and the application opens. Close the application.
14. Click the Save button.
Note: Any path entered in the Action field is considered absolute. If the display with this
entry is moved, the path is not changed from the original entry. If the Action is
entered and saved as a relative path, the system attempts to open the command
using that relative path. In this case, if you need to move the original entry to
another directory or ProcessBook, you may have to redefine the link between the
ProcessBooks. If you move both the original and the linked item and the
relationship between the two file paths is unchanged, you do not need to relink.

Working Directory for Operating System Commands


The Define ProcessBook Entry dialog box has a text box where you can enter the working
directory. The command line recognizes file extension associations.
For example, in the past you needed to enter a command like:
C:\EXCEL\EXCEL.EXE C:\MYWORK\MINE.XLS
Now you can use a command like:
C:\MYWORK\MINE.XLS
In other words, if the string works for the Run command under the File menu of the Program
Manager, it will work in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.
Some applications that you can access with an operating system command, such as MS
Excel, allow only one copy of the application to open, even if you execute the command
several times.

Arrange ProcessBook Entries


Once you have created your entry titles, it is a good idea to consider how they are arranged in
your ProcessBook. Each ProcessBook gives two possible views of your entry titles, Book
View and Outline View.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

31

Work with a ProcessBook

Whether you are in Outline View or Book View, you can edit and rearrange entries, or delete
entries altogether. Some functions are performed the same regardless of the view in which
you are working.
Book View is a useful organizational tool when your ProcessBook has only a few dozen
displays. If your ProcessBook is large and contains many displays, Outline View is faster and
easier to use.

Book View
In Book View

, the ProcessBook displays as a loose-leaf binder.

Tabs indicate major divisions in the ProcessBook. Each tab section has a heading, which may
be any ProcessBook entry. The entry title is used as the tab name. A tab section may contain
several pages of entries representing different types of information. There is no limit to the
number of tabs you may have in a Book. However, as you add tabs or reduce the size of the
ProcessBook, the tabs are stacked to the right of the Book. This might make the ProcessBook
difficult to read in Book View.
When you create a first-level entry in Book View, the name becomes the label for the section
tab. If the entry is the first entry you have added to the ProcessBook, the entry level is
automatically set at 1. Subsequent sub-entries are listed below the main entry. When you
select another first level entry, a new page is created with a new tab. You can have up to 10
levels of entries in a ProcessBook, but levels 3 to 10 are displayed in Book View as though
they were at the same level.
Displays within a tab section are typically arranged in a hierarchical fashion. For example, a
display that includes a boiler, a condenser, and a pump may be at the top level of a tab
section. The boiler, the condenser, and the pump may be separate displays that are arranged
underneath the summary display. Each of these displays can have several displays for their
components.

32

Arrange ProcessBook Entries

Book View

Turn Pages in Book View


1. Click View > Book to view a ProcessBook in Book View (page 32). Notice the top right
corner of the page is divided into two small triangles
.
2. Click the upper triangle to move forward one page, or
Click the lower triangle to move backward a page.
A dark gray triangle indicates there are no more pages in that direction.
3. Click the tabs along the right-hand side to move quickly between sections of a
ProcessBook.
Resize a ProcessBook
1. Click and drag on the frame of a ProcessBook until the window is the size you want.
As you make a window smaller, the ProcessBook is resized so you can still see all of the
tabs. If the window becomes too small to display all the members of a group of displays,
the displays are moved to new pages.
2. If the ProcessBook window becomes too small, all the tabs behind the first tab are
collapsed into one tab labeled More. Click the More tab to display a pop-up list of the
other tab sections.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

33

Work with a ProcessBook

Entries in Book View


When you create a first level entry in Book View, the name becomes the label for the section
tab. If the entry is the first entry you have added to the ProcessBook, the entry level is
automatically set at 1. Subsequent sub-entries are listed below the main entry. When you
select another first level entry, a new page is created with a new tab.
Change the Name of an Entry in Book View
1. Click View > Book to view a ProcessBook in Book View (page 32).
2. In Build mode, double-click the entry you want to change. The Define ProcessBook
Entry dialog box appears.
3. In the Label text box, type a new name.
4. Click OK.
Change the Level of an Entry in Book View
1. Click View > Book to view a ProcessBook in Book View (page 32).
2. In Build mode, double-click the entry you want to change. The Define ProcessBook
Entry dialog box appears.
3. In the Level list, click the level at which you want to reposition the entry in the
ProcessBook hierarchy of entries, or
Type a number between 1 and 10.
4. Click OK.

Outline View
In Outline View

, ProcessBook displays are arranged hierarchically on a page.

Click View > Outline to display a ProcessBook as an outline. When you are in Outline View,
a set of buttons is added to the active ProcessBook window to collapse or expand the outline.
You may need to resize the window so all the buttons are visible. Use the horizontal and
vertical scroll bars to see all entries in the outline.
Hierarchies of entries may be revised by dragging entries from one location to another, or by
promoting and demoting entries.

34

Arrange ProcessBook Entries

Outline View

Collapse or Expand Outline View


You can collapse or expand sections of the outline to view the list of displays in a meaningful
manner.
1. Click View > Outline to view a ProcessBook in Outline View (page 34).
2. Click the black plus sign to the left of an entry to expand it. This shows additional
displays that are subordinate to the selected display.
Collapsed View:

-orClick the transparent plus sign to collapse the list of subordinate displays.
Expanded View:

Note: You can change the font for each level in Outline View in the ProcessBook
Preferences (page 14) dialog box.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

35

Work with a ProcessBook

Rearrange Entries in Outline View


In Build mode, click and drag the entry name up or down (not sideways) to a new location. A
dotted line indicates the location of the entry you are moving.
Alternatively, you can use the four buttons at the top left of the window as follows:
Promote highlighted entry
Demote highlighted entry
Move highlighted entry up
Move highlighted entry down
Change the Name of an Entry in Outline View
1. Click View > Outline.
2. In Build mode, click the entry you want to change.
3. Click Edit > Selected Item. The Define ProcessBook Entry dialog box appears.
4. In the Label box, type a new name.
5. Click OK.
Change the Level of an Entry in Outline View
1. Click View > Outline.
2. In Build mode, click the entry you want to change.
3. Click Edit > Selected Item. The Define ProcessBook Entry dialog box appears.
4. In the Level list, click the level at which you want to reposition the entry in the
ProcessBook hierarchy of entries.
-orType a number between 1 and 10.
5. Click OK.

Copy and Paste an Entry


1. Click on the Build mode pointer and select the entry.
2. Click the Copy button. This copies the selection to the clipboard.
3. If it is not already open, open the ProcessBook where you want to paste the entry.
4. Click the Paste button. This copies the contents of the clipboard to your ProcessBook. A
copy of the original entry is created, not a link to the original.

36

Open an Existing ProcessBook

Note: If you highlight an entry first, the new entry is placed above the highlighted entry.

Remove an Entry
1. In Build mode, select an entry title in either Book View or Outline View.
2. Press the DELETE key. The entry is removed from the ProcessBook.
Note: If you accidentally delete the wrong entry click Edit > Undo.

Save and Close a ProcessBook


After creating a ProcessBook, it is a good idea to name the file and save it immediately. It is
also important to save a ProcessBook periodically while you are working in it.
When you save a ProcessBook, all changes to all entries and to the organizational structure
are stored permanently. The ProcessBook remains open in your workspace so you can
continue working.
1. To save a ProcessBook for the first time, click File > Save or Save As. The Save As
dialog box appears.
2. Type a name for the ProcessBook file. A .piw extension is automatically added.
3. Select the drive and directory where you want to save it.
4. Click OK.

Open an Existing ProcessBook


1. Click File > Open, or
On the standard toolbar, click the Open button.
The Open dialog box appears.
2. Click the specific ProcessBook file (.piw) you want to open.
3. Click OK.
Note: Depending on the settings in the ProcessBook Preferences dialog box, a default
ProcessBook may open automatically when you start FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook keeps track of the four most recently opened
ProcessBooks or independent display files. Instead of using File > Open, you may select a
file name from the bottom of the File menu.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

37

Work with a ProcessBook

Work With Multiple ProcessBooks


You can work in multiple ProcessBooks and/or independent display files at the same time.

Use the File menu to create new or open existing ProcessBooks.

Use the Windows menu to select the ProcessBook title and switch among them.

Click inside a ProcessBook window to make it active.

Switch among the open windows by pressing CTRL+F6.

Properties
Summary Information in ProcessBook
Click File > Properties to display the Summary Information dialog box for a file. The
Summary Information dialog box you see is the same for the ProcessBook as a whole or for
the individual displays.

The following table describes the fields in the Summary Information dialog box:
Field Name

Description

Author

Extracted from the Author field on the General tab in the ProcessBook
Preferences dialog box at the time the ProcessBook is first saved.

Note: You can change the Author field in either


the Summary Information dialog box or the
ProcessBook Preferences dialog box.

38

Title

Name of the ProcessBook (extracted from the original creation of the


ProcessBook).

Subject

May be used to explain the title more fully.

Keywords

May be added at any time.

Properties

Field Name

Description

Comments

May be used for any text entry. You can revise this field at any time.

Properties button

Clicking the Properties button displays the FactoryTalk Historian


ProcessBook Properties (page 39) dialog box, which gives information
about the view currently in the active window.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook File Properties


1. Click File > Properties to display the Summary Information (page 38) dialog box.
2. Click the Properties button. The PI ProcessBook Properties dialog box appears.

Note: If you click the Properties button while a display is open, you launch the Display
Properties dialog box.

The following table describes the fields in the PI ProcessBook Properties dialog box:
Field Name

Description

Title

Extracted from the Summary Information dialog box.

Created

Original date and time the ProcessBook was saved.

Note: If the ProcessBook file is moved to another


machine, the original date and time will be preserved,
however Windows Explorer shows the date and time
the file arrived on the present machine.
Created By

Extracted from the Author field on the General tab in the ProcessBook
Preferences dialog box. Shows the original author, unless the authors
name has been modified in the Summary Information dialog box.

Last Saved

Most recent revision date and time.

Last Saved By

Name of the person who saved the ProcessBook most recently. (Extracted
from the Author field on the General tab in the ProcessBook Preferences
dialog box.) If this field is blank, the PC login name of the author is used.
This is useful for tracking who made which revisions.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

39

Work with a ProcessBook

Field Name

Description

Revision

Number of times the ProcessBook has been revised and saved.

Displays

Total number of entries in the ProcessBook.

System Commands

Total number of operating system command entries in the ProcessBook.

Modify a ProcessBook Title


You can change the name of a ProcessBook at any time.
1. In either Build mode or Run mode, click File > Properties.
2. The Summary Information (page 38) dialog box appears.
3. In the Title box, type a new title.
Note: The ProcessBook title is different from the file name established in the New
dialog box when you created the new ProcessBook. The title bar on the
ProcessBook window displays the file name, which ends in .piw, rather than
the title.

4. Click OK.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Display Properties


1. With a display window selected, click File > Properties to display the Summary
Information (page 38) dialog box for a display.
2. Click the Properties button. The Display Properties dialog box appears.

The following table describes the fields in the Display Properties dialog box:

40

Import Files to a ProcessBook

Field Name

Description

Title

Extracted from the Summary Information dialog box.

Created

Original date and time the ProcessBook was saved.

Note: If the ProcessBook file is moved to another


machine, the original date and time will be preserved,
however Windows Explorer shows the date and time
the file arrived on the present machine.
Created By

Extracted from the Author field on the General tab in the ProcessBook
Preferences dialog box. Shows the original author, unless the authors
name has been modified in the Summary Information dialog box.

Last Saved

Most recent revision date and time.

Last Saved By

Name of the person who saved the ProcessBook most recently. (Extracted
from the Author field on the General tab in the ProcessBook Preferences
dialog box.) If this field is blank, the PC login name of the author is used.
This is useful for tracking who made which revisions.

Revision

Number of times the ProcessBook has been revised and saved.

Total Symbols

Total number of symbols in the display.

Tags

Total number of unique Historian Points used in the display.

Dynamic Symbols

The number of display symbols that are dynamic symbols.

Static Symbols

The number of display symbols that are static symbols.

Servers Required

The number of different Historian Servers referenced in the display.

Import Files to a ProcessBook


1. To import PIDisDiff or Historian-Graphics files into a ProcessBook, start FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook.
2. Open a ProcessBook (page 37) into which you want to import the files or create a new
ProcessBook.
3. In Build mode, click File > Import.
The Import Files dialog box appears.
4. Select the file type.
5. Select the drive and directory where the file resides, or
Type the path and file name in the File Name box. You can select more than one file at a
time.
6. Click the Open button.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

41

Work with a ProcessBook

The status bar displays each file as it is imported. When completed, a message displays
the number of files successfully imported. If errors occurred during the import process, a
message box is displayed at the end of the import process showing the number of errors.
You can check the message log from the Status Report icon at the bottom of your
display.
Note: Depending on the size, some files may take several minutes to import.

When a trend is successfully imported, a new Text display showing the full file name is
added to the ProcessBook. Each trend is added as a subordinate display and retains its
original trend name. For graphics, the VAX display name becomes the Display name. Once
converted, graphics and trends can be edited like any other display.

File Sharing Capability


Several users may access the same ProcessBook file at the same time. However, if one person
makes changes to a particular display entry and saves the changes, then other users are
blocked from saving changes in that display. This protects against accidental saving conflicts.
If a user has already changed a display, the second user who wishes to make changes to the
display receives an error message explaining that someone else has already edited and saved
the display. The second user then has two options:

Save the changes under a different ProcessBook name, thus creating two ProcessBooks,
-or-

Close the ProcessBook and reopen it so that the new version of the display is shown.
Then make changes and save again.

Open the Summary Information (page 38) dialog box to view the name of the person who
has made changes and saved the file most recently.

Move a ProcessBook to Another PC


If you decide to move a ProcessBook to another PC, you may experience some differences in
display entry appearance on the new PC:

42

When the number of colors is different between the original PC and new PC, FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook uses the closest color when drawing an entry. This is true for any
graphics you may have included in an entry.

If an entry calls for a font that is not available on the new PC, FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook substitutes a similar font.

If a ProcessBook includes links to other entries, ProcessBooks, or applications,


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook may not be able to locate them if the path on the new
PC is not the same as the old one.

Node names (for Historian Servers) must be identical.

Move a ProcessBook to Another PC

Different monitors have different resolutions, which may distort the appearance of an
existing ProcessBook.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook records both the absolute and relative paths for Linked
displays and Linked ProcessBooks. This means you can copy ProcessBooks to new
directories without breaking links as long as either all the linked files are placed in a similar
directory tree or all the drive, directory, and file names remain the same.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

43

Chapter 4

Work with a Display


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook provides tools for manipulating and analyzing the
information shown in a display. For example, you can:

Display the point attributes of a tag

Change the time range that is used for values, bars, trends, XYPlots, SQC plots, and
Multi-State symbols

Use a Trend Cursor to see the value of plotted tags at a specific point in time

Create an instant trend

Overview of Display Elements


Displays contain a variety of individual items, including static elements, buttons, OLE
objects, and dynamic elements.

Static Symbols
Static symbols are symbols that do not automatically change as time passes, such as an
image, process diagram, or descriptive text.
Static symbols include all items in a display that do not connect to the Historian Server or
other application to retrieve data, and do not start any application. Text labels and flow lines
are examples of static symbols. Other types include rectangles, circles, arcs, and images.

Dynamic Symbols
Dynamic symbols are values, bars, trends, XYPlots, SQC charts, and multi-state symbols
(such as a pump image tied to temperature data) that change over time, and are based on the
value of a tag in the Historian Server. If you wish to see how a dynamic symbol was defined,
select it and click the Item Definition button on the Drawing toolbar.

Dynamic symbols may also report data from outside databases through queries.

If you rest your mouse on a dynamic symbol, you can see a ToolTip with the current
value, tag name, and time stamp.

Icons for questionable, substituted, and annotated FactoryTalk Historian data can also
appear on your displays.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

45

Work with a Display

Most point types (page 157) can be used with any dynamic symbol. There are some
restrictions on string and timestamp data.

Buttons
Buttons are elements that create a link to other applications, such as a calculator or word
processor, or other ProcessBooks or displays. You can also use buttons to execute a script.
For example, if you find you work in a particular display and frequently need to update a
report with the information you are monitoring, you can add a button that automatically opens
a spreadsheet program. You also can use a button to perform common actions using a script,
like printing a display, or connect to related displays, ProcessBooks, or Web sites.

OLE Objects
OLE objects include information from outside applications, such as text, spreadsheets, or
graphics. This information may be configured to update dynamically. OLE objects may be
either linked (page 195) or embedded (page 192) into displays.

Manage Displays and Independent Display Files


Open a Display
Use any of these procedures to open a display from either Book View (page 32) or Outline
View (page 34) of a ProcessBook:

Click on the display title, then on the New button to open the selected display in a new
window.

Click on the display title, then on the Open button to open the display into the last
display window you used. If none are open, a display window opens.

With the Run Mode pointer, double-click the display. The display opens and appears
within an existing window, if possible.

Click and drag the display title to an unused area in the application workspace and release
the mouse. This opens a new display in addition to already opened displays. If you drag
the display on top of an open display, it closes that display while opening the dragged
display.

To use the keyboard instead of the mouse, use CTRL+F6, to select the ProcessBook, then
use the up or down arrow keys to select the display title. Press Enter. If you have more
than one display open, it replaces the open display with the new display. Pressing
CTRL+N is the same as clicking the New button.

If the display is a Display, Linked Display, or Linked ProcessBook, the display is opened and
the contents are displayed on your workspace. If the display is an Operating System
Command, the command is executed or the application is started.

46

Manage Displays and Independent Display Files

Note: If you click on an Operating System Command more than once in the same
session, it may run the application repeatedly. This depends on the application
and how it has been set up.

Displays re-open in the same position, size, and shape as when they were last saved.
Open Several Displays at One Time
In addition to the procedures for opening a display, you can also open multiple displays
simultaneously. Press SHIFT while highlighting the displays you want to open in Outline
view. Click the New button at the bottom of the list of displays. Each display or linked
display is opened in your workspace.
Manage Multiple Open Displays
Just as you can work with multiple ProcessBooks, you can have multiple displays open in the
work area.
To make a display active, click in the display window or press CTRL+F6 to toggle between
open displays.
To improve viewing when there are multiple open displays, choose:

Window > CascadeThe titles of all open displays and ProcessBooks appear in a
cascaded list down the screen.

Window > TileAll open displays and ProcessBooks appear in a tiled view.

Window > <display title>The selected display is active.

Open Independent Display Files


Independent Display Files use a .pdi extension in the file name.
When you double-click on a display file in Windows Explorer, a copy of the FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook application installed on your PC opens, just as it would if you doubleclicked on a .piw file. The independent display appears inside the application.

Zoom Display Size


Use the Zoom command to change the size of the drawing within a display window.
1. Click View > Zoom

. The Zoom dialog box appears.

2. Click a percentage, or
Type a number in the Custom text box to enlarge or reduce the drawing. The Custom
text box displays the current Scale Factor. Typing a number greater than the current
Scale Factor enlarges the drawing; typing a number less than the current Scale Factor
reduces it.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

47

Work with a Display

3. Select Fit all symbols to resize all the symbols in a display to fit within the window.
If you want only specific symbols to fit within the display window, select the symbols,
and then select Fit Selected Symbols. The items in the display resize and take up the
entire window. OLE objects are not included.
4. Click OK to accept your changes.
Note: You must save the display before closing it for your zoom settings to appear
the next time you open it.

To resize the window:

Use the Maximize and Minimize buttons in the upper right hand corner of your display
window to adjust your display size. When you maximize a display, all open display
windows are maximized. You can also drag the edge or corner of the window to the
desired size.
Note: If you have your Preference setting for Preserve Aspect Ratio check box
selected, the contents of the display resize as you resize the window. If this
option is not enabled, the size of each element in the display does not change
as you change the window size.

Use Full Screen Mode


1. Click the Full Screen button on the Full Screen toolbar
the display enlarges to fit the screen.

. Other toolbars vanish and

2. Click the Full Screen button again to restore your toolbars. A default keyboard shortcut
of F11 also toggles between Full Screen and Normal presentations.
Note: You can customize the Full Screen toolbar to contain other buttons to use with a
Full Screen display.

Search for a Display


1. Open the ProcessBooks (page 37) you want to search.
2. Click Tools > Display Search & Run. The Display Search dialog box appears.

48

Manage Displays and Independent Display Files

3. In the Name box, type one or more of the letters of the display name.
4. In the Look in drop-down list, click the location you want to search.
-orIn the drop-down list, click Browse, and then locate the appropriate folder.
5. Select the Look in subfolders check box (optional).
6. Click the Search button.
7. The search results are displayed under Results.
8. Under Filename, click the display you want to open and then click OK.

Reduce a Display to an Icon to Save Space


If you find your work area cluttered with many open displays, you can reduce a display to an
icon by clicking its Minimize button. Even though the display is minimized, it continues to
be updated with information from the Historian Server, however the results are not shown
until the window is restored. When you want to use the display, double-click the icon.

Save a Display
A display may be saved within a ProcessBook or as an independent file (.pdi).
1. Click File > Save or Save As.
2. From the Save as type drop-down box, select one of the following six formats. The
default is .pdi:

.pdiDisplay file. If you select this format your display becomes an independent
file that updates under certain circumstances.
.svgSVG file for Web use. FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.0 or higher only
supports version 3.0 or higher of the SVG add-in. See the SVG add-in release notes
for more information.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

49

Work with a Display

The last four file types are graphics formats and do not update. If you choose one of the
graphic formats, the display in focus is unchanged by the Save-As operation. The display
is left open and remains in the same mode (Run or Build).

.jpgJPG-JPEG-JFIF compliant
.bmp32-bit Bitmap
.wmfWindows Metafile
.pngPortable Network Graphics

Display Settings
To edit display properties, click Edit > Display, or
double-click the Time Zone setting in the Status bar. The Display Settings dialog box
appears.

Background ColorThe color applied to the area of the display where there are no symbols.
This field uses a color well control to provide color choices. The color selected in this field
also becomes the default background color for new displays.
Time ZoneThis field determines whether the local computer or Historian Server time zone
is used for interpreting dates and times for this particular display.
ConnectorsThe Enable Connector Attachments check box allows a symbol dragged and
dropped on a Connector symbol to be attached to that Connector. Clearing the check box
disables this functionality for the Display. Note that even if this feature is disabled for the
Display, you can still use the Connectors dialog box to attach Symbols to Connectors.

50

Manage Displays and Independent Display Files

Enable ScriptingWhen displays have many symbols on them, the performance of


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook may be affected. One way to improve the situation is to
disable the ability to code the majority of those symbols. In order to disable scripting and
improve performance, you can take the following actions:

In the Enable Scripting section, clear the Automatically Enable Scripting check box.
This adds new symbols to the display without the overhead of enabling scripting if it isn't
needed.

If the display already has many enabled symbols on it, click the Disable Scripting for
All Symbols... button in the Enable Scripting section. This button removes the scripting
capability for all existing symbols to help improve performance.

OKClicking this button accepts the changes made and closes the dialog box. These settings
are saved as part of the Display object.

Display Scrolling Properties

Run mode scrollingDetermines the scroll bar behavior of display windows in Run mode.
Build mode scrollingDetermines the scroll bar behavior of display windows in Build
mode.
On

Display contains scroll bars all the time.

Off

Scroll bars never appear.

Automatic

Scroll bars appear when needed.

Status Bar Indicators


The following appear on the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook status bar:
Image

Name
Time Zone (page 50)

Layers (page 66)


Troubleshooting Icon (page
145)

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

51

Work with a Display

Displays the current default


color for symbol line, fill, and
background color.
Keyboard Numeric Lock is on.
Keyboard Scroll Lock is on.

Drawing Tools
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook includes a drawing environment with features that allow
you to create symbols and graphics within an entry.
You can use the drawing tools to:

Create ellipses, polygons, rectangles, arcs, lines, and polylines

Add dynamic elements such as values, bars, and trends

Add buttons and graphic files

Add ActiveX controls

The Drawing toolbar contains a set of buttons used for creating drawings and the Draw
menu contains the corresponding commands.
To use the drawing tools, click the appropriate button.
When you draw a line or other shape, the tool uses the current formatting attribute (page 54)
preferences.
Each of these objects is considered a symbol by FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. In Build
mode, when you select a symbol by clicking it with your mouse, you see small squares
around the bounding rectangle of the symbol. These are called selection handles and allow
you to resize the symbol. For arcs, polygons, and polylines, there are also reshaping handles
at the intersection of the line segments.
Each symbol has a name, reflecting the order in which it was added to the display, such as
Rectangle1, Rectangle2, etc.
In Build mode (or VBA Design mode), an identifying ToolTip (page 58) appears whenever
your mouse hovers over a symbol.
Note: If you are drawing multiple objects, press the CTRL key while selecting the
drawing tool. This lets you continue to work with that tool until you select a
different tool.

Organizing Symbols
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook provides several tools to help you organize your
drawings. These tools include a drawing grid, flip and rotate capabilities, and the ability to

52

Drawing Tools

change the order in which objects overlap each other. You can move and resize drawing
objects. You can also divide a display into layers so that you can segregate various elements.
For example, you might separate HVAC elements from Electrical elements in a display.
Any of these functions can be performed on a single screen element or group of them. For
information on grouping objects, see Grouping Symbols (page 136).
Make sure you have selected the item or items with the Build Mode pointer.
OLE objects behave somewhat differently; their behavior is discussed under Commands that
Ignore OLE Objects (page 201).

Drawing Area
The drawing area of a display is actually much larger than your monitor. There are scroll bars
on the display window for moving around this area.
You should plan to set a few options before you begin drawing:

Consider turning on snap-to grid and setting the grid size, font style, and default colors of
lines, backgrounds, and fills before you begin. It is usually easier to work with a grid
when laying out a display. Symbols in your drawing automatically align themselves with
the grid lines or the intersections of grid lines. Grid lines not only make it easier to place
objects in the drawing, but it helps keep the objects proportional. You can start with one
grid size and then modify it as your work gets more detailed.

Select a font and font size for any values, trends, or text boxes you might add to the
drawing.

Select colors for lines, fills, and backgrounds that are easy on the eyes. For example, if
you are projecting on a large video screen, a black background with colored lines is
better, but if you are printing, a white background is better.

While you are drawing, you can use the zoom feature to zoom in on an area that requires
more attention. Zoom out if the drawing is larger than your monitor.

Drawing Grid
The grid is a system of vertical and horizontal lines spaced at regular intervals on the drawing
area. Dots are placed at the intersection of the grid lines. The grid helps you align drawing
objects.
When you move an object to a location on the drawing area, the corners or edges of the object
are aligned with the closest grid intersection. This is called snap-to-grid or grid snap. When
you turn off grid snap, you can move an object to any location within the drawing area.
You determine the interval at which you want the grid lines to be spaced by setting the grid
size.
Set Grid Size and Grid Snap
1. In Build mode, open a display.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

53

Work with a Display

2. On the Arrange menu, click Grid Size.


3. The Grid Size dialog box appears.
4. In the Lines per Screen Unit box, type or select the number of grid lines per unit of
drawing space.
Note: The size of a unit as displayed on your monitor varies according to the
monitor's resolution and driver software.

5. Select the Snap to Grid check box. Once grid snap is on, any symbols you draw are
automatically aligned to the grid.
Note: The Snap to Grid command also appears on the Arrange menu.

6. Click OK.

Formatting
Each symbol you draw and place on a display has attributes that determine how the symbol
looks. The fill and line attributes that are currently selected on the Display Window (page
17) tab of the ProcessBook Preference dialog box are applied to any new drawing symbol.
You may configure these attributes for individual symbols or for all selected symbols as a
group.
The Symbol Formatting toolbar contains buttons for formatting fonts, colors, and line styles.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook also includes the older Formatting toolbar to support
backwards compatibility

Editable Formatting Attributes


The following table shows the editable attributes for each symbol.
Colors
Line

Fill

Background

Style

Weight

Ends

Line

Rectangle

Text

Ellipse

Arc

Value

Polygon

Polyline

54

Line Styles

X
X

X
X

Formatting

Bar

Trend

XYPlot

SQC

Set Font
To determine what type of formatting is applicable for each symbol, refer to the table of
editable formatting attributes.
1. In Build mode, open a display, and click the symbol(s) whose font you want to change.
2. On the Symbol Formatting toolbar, click a name in the Font box.

Note: When choosing fonts, plan to use fonts that other FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook users are likely to have. If another user does not have the fonts
you used, FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook attempts to match the font to an
existing font. However, the match may make it difficult for another user to read
the entry.

3. Type or click a point size in the Font Size box.

Set Line Color


To determine what type of formatting is applicable for each symbol, refer to the table of
editable formatting attributes.
1. In Build mode, open a display, and click the symbol(s) whose line color you want to
change.
2. On the Symbol Formatting toolbar, click the Line Color button

Depending on the symbol type, the following elements change to the color displayed on
the button.

Symbols that display text use the line color to determine the color of the text within
the symbol
Symbols that have lines (such as ellipses) use the line color to change lines in the
symbol

3. Click the arrow on the right side of the Line Color button to display the color palette.
Choose from the 16 colors available or click on one of these two buttons:

Custom ColorLaunches the Color dialog box where you can choose additional
colors from a color well of options
NoneDisables line color. Setting the line color to None for Pen elements on a trend
hides the trace and its associated markers

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

55

Work with a Display

Set Fill Color


To determine what type of formatting is applicable for each symbol, refer to the table of
editable formatting attributes.
1. In Build mode, open a display, and click the symbol(s) whose fill color you want to
change.
2. On the Symbol Formatting toolbar, click the Fill Color button
of the selected symbol(s) changes.

. The interior color

Note: The Fill Color button is disabled if the selected symbol does not support this
property.

3. Click the arrow on the right side of the Fill Color button to display the color palette.
Choose from the 16 colors available or click on one of these two buttons:

Custom ColorLaunches the Color dialog box where you can choose additional
colors from a color well of options
NoneDisables fill color. Setting the fill color to None shows the display
background color.

Set Background Color


To determine what type of formatting is applicable for each symbol, refer to the table of
editable formatting attributes.
1. In Build mode, open a display, and click the symbol(s) whose background color you
want to change.
2. On the Symbol Formatting toolbar, click the Background Color button
background of the selected symbol changes.

. The

Note: The Background Color button is disabled if the selected symbol does not
support that property.

3. Click the arrow on the right side of the Background Color button to display the color
palette. Choose from the 16 colors available or click on one of these two buttons:

56

Custom ColorLaunches the Color dialog box where you can choose additional
colors from a color well of options
NoneDisables background color. Setting the background color to None shows the
display background color.

Formatting

Set Line Weight


To determine what type of formatting is applicable for each symbol, refer to the table of
editable formatting attributes.
1. In Build mode, open a display, and click the symbol(s) whose line weight you want to
change.
2. On the Symbol Formatting toolbar, click the Line Weight button
weight options appears below the button.

. A list of six line

3. Select a line weight. The thickness of the selected symbol's line weight changes.

Set Line Style


To determine what type of formatting is applicable for each symbol, refer to the table of
editable formatting attributes.
1. In Build mode, open a display, and click the symbol(s) whose line style you want to
change.
2. On the Symbol Formatting toolbar, click the Line Style button
. A list of six line
style options appears below the button. Options include solid, dash, dot, dash-dot, dashdot-dot, and none. Selecting None for a trend Pen element hides the trace line, but not the
marker.
3. Select a line option. The symbol's line pattern changes.

Set Line Ends


To determine what type of formatting is applicable for each symbol, refer to the table of
editable formatting attributes.
1. In Build mode, open a display, and click the symbol(s) whose line ends you want to
change.
2. On the Symbol Formatting toolbar, click the Line Ends button
. A list of four line
ends options appears below the button. These options determine whether arrows appear at
the end of lines.
3. Select a line ends option. The selected symbol's line pattern changes.

Set Formatting Paintbrush


To determine what type of formatting is applicable for each symbol, refer to the table of
editable formatting attributes.
1. In Build mode, open a display, and click the symbol(s) whose font, color, or line
formatting you want to replicate.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

57

Work with a Display

2. On the Symbol Formatting toolbar, click the Formatting Paintbrush button

Note: Double clicking the Formatting Paintbrush button allows you to apply
formatting to more than one symbol. To turn off the Formatting Paintbrush
selection, click the button again or press ESC.

3. Click another symbol. The formatting of the first symbol is copied to the selected
symbol(s).

ToolTip Statistics
In Run mode, hover your mouse over a point on a dynamic symbol to display a ToolTip with
summary statistics. Engineering units are shown next to the value followed by the timestamp
paired with the value. If you hover your mouse over a point where there is more than one
trace, each trace's data is shown on a separate line.
Click Tools > ToolTip Statistics to launch the ToolTip Statistics dialog box, where you can
select what type of data you want to see when viewing ToolTips.

Note: The options under Summary Statistics to Show do not affect ToolTips for
XYPlots.

ToolTip Statistics are shown for any dynamic symbol that has FactoryTalk Historian data.
The effective time range of the display is used to aggregate the data for these statistics.

Time Range and Playback Toolbar


The Time Range and Playback Toolbar allows you to play, pause, loop, and manually
scroll a display through a pre-set time period. You can move backwards and forwards in time,
alter the display range duration, and revert to the original symbol definitions.

58

Time Range and Playback Toolbar

Playing back a display can be useful for showing the conditions of various systems and
analyzing conditions leading up to a specific time frame or event.
The Time Range and Playback Toolbar is enabled for the active display and disabled if there
is no active display. You can right-click anywhere in the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
toolbar area and show or hide the toolbar from the context menu.

The toolbar contains a time tracker that shows the display range, the scroll period that shows
the start and end time for the entire playback session, and the following controls:
Revert
Click the Revert button

to restore all the active displays to their configured time ranges.

This button is available only when the display is not in playback mode.
Back or Forward One Time Period
Click the One Time Period Backwards or One Time Period Forwards
to
adjust the display range (page 62) back or forward one time period for the active display or
all active displays, if synchronized.
When you use these buttons to move beyond the start or end time of the scroll period, the
scroll period expands to contain the display range.
These buttons are available only when playback is not active.
Time Tracker
The time tracker shows the Display range (page 62) and available Scroll period (page 62).

Go to Current Time
Click the Go to Current Time button
the current time (*).

to move the display range so that its end time is

This action does not change the dimensions of the display range.
This button is available only when the display is not in playback mode.
Change the Display Range
Click the Change Display Range button
or double-click the display range to open the
Change Display Range dialog box (page 63).
Synchronize

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

59

Work with a Display

Click the Synchronize button


to enable synchronization when one or more FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook Displays are open. When synchronization is enabled, time-related
actions that you perform through the Time Range and Playback toolbar affect every display
that is currently open and every new display that you open. Synchronization is disabled by
default. Once on, synchronization remains enabled even if you close all displays.
Time range actions that you make from the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Time Range
toolbar or a button on the standard toolbar are not synchronized.
Only symbols that are already on the active display are synchronized. Symbols that you add
to the display are not synchronized until the next time the display range changes.
Synchronization is temporarily suspended during playback. The displays are resynchronized
when playback is paused or stopped.
Repeat
Click the Repeat button
scroll period (page 62).

to make the playback repeat each time it reaches the end of the

End Playback
Click the Stop button

to end playback.

This action resets the position of the Time Tracker to the far left and changes the Pause/Play
icon to Play.
Pause/Play
The Pause/Play button

drives the playback feature.

The Play button changes to the pause icon


when a display is in playback mode. When
playback is paused, the button shows the play button.
Note: The playback rate is reduced if FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook cannot retrieve
display data quickly enough to keep up with the desired playback speed. When
this occurs an information icon appears on the right side of the time tracker.

Fast Forward
Click the Fast Forward button
to accelerate the rate of play back. Each successive click
of Fast Forward doubles the rate at which the display plays back. The first click doubles
playback speed, then advances to 4x, 8x, 16x, and 32x the playback speed. An additional
click returns the playback to the default playback speed.
Click Play to resume normal speed playback. The playback continues from the current
position rather than starting from the beginning.
Options
Click the Options button to open the
Calendar

60

Scroll Options (page 61) dialog box.

Time Range and Playback Toolbar

Hover at either end of the scroll period to see the Calendar

icon.

Click the scroll range while the calendar icon is displayed to open a calendar to set that end of
the scroll period.
The calendar accepts any time string format supported by Historian and returns dates and
times using Windows time configured with the current regional settings of the client
computer.

Scroll Options
Use the Scroll Options dialog box to set the default behavior settings for the Time Range
and Playback Toolbar. These defaults apply to the active display or all displays, if
synchronization is on. The defaults are retained when FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is
closed and re-opened on a per user basis.

The following settings are controlled through this window:

Display Range (page 62)use any accepted Historian Time (page 150) input parameter
to set the length of the display range.

Scroll Period (page 62)use the spin box or calendar controls to select start and end
dates and times.

Refresh Rateselect the number of seconds between updates of the display that is being
played.

Speedselect the rate at which the display plays back. The speed is expressed in units
per second. Speed can be expressed as milliseconds, seconds, minutes, hours, days, and
months, and must be smaller than the display range.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

61

Work with a Display

Scroll Period
The scroll period marks the earliest and latest time for which you can manipulate or
playback a display.
Scroll Period Constraints
The scroll period must be larger than the display range (page 62).
The scroll period end time must be after the scroll period start time.
An error icon appears to the far right of the time tracker if you violate either of these
conditions.
Scroll Period Time Format
The displayed time format of the scroll period depends on its duration. If the scroll period is
less than 24 hours, then the start and end time is shown in hours and minutes. If the scroll
time is 24 hours or more, then the start and end time is shown as a date.
The time zone of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook determines whether the time is shown
in the client time zone or the server time zone.
Change the Scroll Period
There are several ways to change the scroll period:

Hover the mouse next to the left or right arrow of the scroll period to change the mouse
icon to a calendar icon. Click the icon to open the calendar where you can modify the
dates.

Click the Scroll Options button

to launch the Scroll Options (page 61) dialog box.

Display Range
The display range
represents the time duration shown on the trend
symbols, or for a bar or value, the end time of the display range is the symbol time.
The display range must be shorter than the scroll period (page 62).
Change the Display Range
There are several ways to change the display range:

62

Click the Change Display Range button


or double-click the display range to open
the Change Display Range dialog box (page 63).

Double-click anywhere in the display range to open the Change Display Range (page
63) dialog box.

Time Range and Playback Toolbar

Click and drag one of the display range thumbs.

Click the display range and rotate the mouse wheel.

Click the Playback Options button


box.

Click the display range and use the up and down arrow keys to change the size of the
display range.

to launch the Scroll Options (page 61) dialog

Note: A display must be reverted to re-establish any build time configuration time ranges
for individual symbols.

Change Display Range Dialog box


Use the Change Display Range dialog box to specify the display range.

Rules for time settings:

The start and end time boxes support all time string formats recognized by Historian.

You can edit the times manually. The dynamic time strings, such as *-1h, that you set are
added to the drop-down list. .

Static time strings, such as 1-Jan-2009, are not added to the list.

Each drop down list saves the ten most recently used values.

Settings are stored per user.

This button is available only when playback is not active.

Move the Display Range During Playback


The location of the display range on the scroll bar tracks the time of the playback on the
display. The display range always advances from left to right from its initial start position
while playing.
There are several ways to move the display range while you play back a display:

Use the Time Tracker arrow keys to move the display range current position.

Click the scroll bar on either side of the display range to move the display range to the
position where you click.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

63

Work with a Display

Click anywhere in the display range and use the left and right arrow keys to move the
display range back and forward across the scroll period.

Time Range Toolbar

The Time Range toolbar is used for working with dynamic symbols. This toolbar is hidden
by default for new installations of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.3.2.229 and later.
Note: We recommend you use the Time Range and Playback Toolbar (page 58) to
manage time in a display.

In general, the commands on this toolbar affect only the symbols selected on the display. If
no symbols are selected, all symbols are affected. This toolbar, which must be used in Run
mode, contains three buttons:

Revert (page 64)returns the trend or other dynamic symbol to its original setting.

Change Time Range (page 64)opens a dialog box to set new, temporary start and end
times. For Bars, Values, and Multi-State symbols you can only set an end time.

Scroll Bar (page 65)scrolls through time values.

Revert Time Range

To discard any of the changes you have made to the time range of a trend or the effective
time of a Bar, Value, or Multi-State symbol and return it to its saved setting:
In Run mode, click View > Revert, or
Click the Revert button.

Change the Time Range

The Time Range command lets you enter new starting and ending times for dynamic
symbols. When you specify a time range for a single-time dynamic element, such as a MultiState symbol, bar or value, only the end time is used.
64

Time Range Toolbar

Note: The time represented on your display is the time relative to the Historian Server,
unless you have selected the client time zone setting for your display. If the
Historian Server to which you are connected is in a different time zone, time on
your display represents the server time zone, not the local one.

1. In Run mode, select the dynamic symbol or symbols for which you want to change the
time range. If no symbols are selected, the time range change affects all dynamic symbols
on the display.
2. Click the Time Range button on the Time Range toolbar, or
Click View > Time Range.
The Change Time Range dialog box opens, allowing you to change the time span for a
trend or plot, or the effective time for a bar, value, or Multi-State symbol.

3. Select new starting and ending times from the drop-down lists or define your own starting
and ending times. Time ranges can be relative, absolute, or combined.
4. Click OK. The selected elements change to reflect the new time range.

Use the Scrolling Time Range

1. In Run mode, select the dynamic symbol or symbols for which you want to change the
time range. If no symbols are selected, the time range change affects all dynamic symbols
in the display.
2. On the Time Range toolbar, click the forward or backward Scroll Time button, or
Click and drag the Scroll Time slider, or
Click the space on either side of the Scroll Time slider to increment or decrement by a
time span.
If the slider is dragged, a ToolTip is updated with the end time that is applied when you
release the mouse button.
3. Release the mouse button. Selected symbols are refreshed with the new time range.
Note: You can scroll the time for all items in a display or selected items. If no trend is
included in the selected items, the scroll buttons are disabled.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

65

Work with a Display

Time Forward and Back

Use the time backward and forward buttons to scroll the time range forward or backward. To
do this:
1. Click on the desired symbols with the Run Mode pointer.
2. Click the Time Forward or Time Backward button.
Trends scroll by the time range specified in the trend definition. When you select multiple
trends, each trend maintains its time range as it is scrolled. If you select a trend and a
dynamic element such as a value, the non-trend symbol scrolls by the time range specified in
the first trend's definition.
For example, if the trend displays data from 1:00 to 4:00 (three hours) and the value has a
timestamp of 5:00, scrolling backward shows trend data from 10:00 to 1:00. The value's
timestamp also changes by three hours (2:00).

Set Time Range for Future Trends


To set trends with an end date in the future, enter an end time of the present (*) plus an
amount of time, such as 4 hours or 8 days. These trends update if they are less than the
maximum update time range limit. The default update time range limit is 7 days, but you can
change that setting in the procbook.ini (page 214) file.
A trend can also be scrolled into the future using the time range buttons, but then it does not
update.

Layers within Displays


You can divide a display into layers containing one or more symbols. This feature could be
useful in building a complex display with several systems depicted (electrical, HVAC, etc.).
If you separate systems by layer, you can view any one of the layers by making the other
layers invisible.
Before creating a display you should determine how you might implement layers. When a
display has no layers, all new symbols are added to the base layer of the display, thus
removing the control afforded by using a layers-based strategy.

66

A layer can be Visible or Invisible in Run mode. Layers are always Visible in Build
mode.

You can move symbols between layers or remove them from a layer.

Add, make visible, restack, and lock layers while ProcessBook is in either Run mode or
Build mode. Delete layers only when ProcessBook is in Build mode.

Layers within Displays

Create Layers
1. Open a display.
2. Click the Layers toolbar button

, or

Double-click the Layers icon in the Status Bar, or


Click View > Layers. The Layers dialog box appears.

3. Click the New Layer button to open the New Layer dialog box.
A default name comprised of the word Layer prefixed to the layer number appears. The
layer number does not necessarily match the index number; it is simply the next unused
integer in the list.

A new layer is added to the end of the collection. Its index is one higher than the previous
high index number. All symbols added to this layer are displayed over symbols on lower
indexed layers.
4. Click OK to return to the Layers dialog box.

Indexspecifies the index number of the layer. The index is used in determining the
display order (Z Order) of overlapping symbols. A layer with a lower index number
is lower in the stack than one with a higher number. Higher layers may obscure
symbols in lower levels.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

67

Work with a Display

Countthis is a read-only value that contains the number of symbols on a layer. A


composite symbol is counted once and each of its subordinate individual symbols is
also counted.
Up/down arrowsbuttons at the right side of the dialog box are used to move the
relative position of one layer to another within a display. As a layer is moved down
the list, its index number becomes larger, and vice versa. Symbols on layers with
higher index numbers may hide or cover symbols with lower-index numbers. Locked
layers cannot be reordered.

5. Select the appropriate check boxes:

Visiblemakes the elements in the layer visible in Run mode. New layers are
visible by default.
Activeaccepts all new symbols as you add them to the display. Inactive prevents
symbols from being added automatically. New layers are Active by default.
Lockedprevents you from adding symbols to a layer. Existing symbols on locked
layers cannot be cut, copied, pasted, deleted, or moved. New layers are not locked by
default.

6. Repeat steps 3-5 as needed. Click OK to accept changes and close the Layers dialog box.

Assign Symbols to Layers


If you have at least one layer in a display, you can assign symbols to it.
1. Select a symbol, right-click, and select Assign Layers.
The Assign Layers dialog box appears and displays all of your existing layers.

2. Select or clear the checkbox next to a layer name to add or remove the selected symbol
from a layer. If a layer name is grayed out, the layer is locked and you cannot add or
remove symbols. You may add the same symbol to more than one layer.
3. Click OK.

68

Migrating Displays to Another Historian Server

Layers and Composite Symbols


To link symbols and create composite symbols click Arrange > Group, or click the Group
button
grouped.

on the Layout toolbar. The symbols may be on different layers when they are

Assign a composite symbol to any layer(s) regardless of its component symbols.

You cannot group symbols on locked layers into a composite symbol, but the layers may
be locked after the symbols are grouped.

You cannot delete a composite symbol that contains symbols on locked layers, however,
you can delete an unlocked layer.

Normally, a symbol existing only on one layer is deleted if the layer is deleted, but when
the symbol is inside a composite symbol it is not deleted. It stays in the composite
symbol.

If a composite symbol is hidden, all its parts are hidden. If the composite symbol is
visible its individual parts may still be hidden if the layers they are assigned to are
hidden.

Since you cannot individually select the parts of a composite symbol you must first use
the Ungroup button
individually.

to separate them in order to change their layer assignments

Active Layers Status Bar


The Layers icon on the Status Bar shows whether or not the display has more than one layer.
This icon appears in the status bar at the bottom of your application, indicating one or more
layers in the display currently in focus. Double-clicking the icon displays the Layers dialog
box.
If no layers have been defined, the icon appears with a slash through it.
Hovering the mouse over the icon displays a ToolTip with the names of any active layers,
beginning with the top layer.

Active Layers Status Bar Area (with ToolTip)

Migrating Displays to Another Historian Server


When you want to use an existing tag with a different Historian Server, FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook attempts to locate the correct tags. Each ProcessBook saves the tag information
for all of the symbols it contains. Beginning with PI SDK 1.3.6, when you use a FactoryTalk

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

69

Work with a Display

Historian ProcessBook symbol with a Historian Server other than the one for which it was
created, the Historian Server is added automatically if it is discoverable on the network.
If the Historian Server is not discoverable, then FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook prompts
you to select a new Historian Server. Once the new Historian Server is selected, FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook searches the database for a matching tag ID.

If a match is found, FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook retrieves the tag name associated
with the tag ID and compares the tag name with the saved tag name.

If the tag names are the same, the value is shown in the entry.

If the tag names are different, FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook searches the database
for the tag ID of the saved tag name. If a match is found, the value is shown in the entry.

If a match is not found, FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook uses the tag ID saved with
the ProcessBook regardless of the different tag names.

If no tag ID or tag name is found in the database, FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook


Displays a message informing you of the missing tag.

This behavior is governed by the value of PB2TagResolution, located in the


procbook.ini (page 214) file's Data Manager section. PB2TagResolution can take
the following values:

70

0[default] the Point ID is used to match a missing tag before the stored point name

1uses the tag name before checking Point ID. This mimics behavior of older version of
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook that are based on the PI API.

Chapter 5

Visualize Data with Symbols


Symbols are the building blocks of a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Display.

Dynamic symbols allow you to view live data in your display. These symbols are updated
in real time as FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook receives updates from your Historian
Server.
Note: The maximum number of dynamic symbols per display is 278,343.

Chapter

Static symbols allow you to embed graphics, text, lines, and other images in a display.

Trends

A trend is a dynamic symbol that lets you view values plotted against time. Trends can show
the value of one or more data items over a time period. Trends are typically used to display
time series data, though they may also include non-time series data as well.
Some components of trends include:

TracesLines drawn on a trend to represent a series of data points from a data item.

PensFormatting components used to determine the presentation of data lines (traces)


on trends.

Plot TitleThe title of the trend being configured. The plot title can be blank, but a title
is supplied by default.

Grid linesUsed to mark intervals along the time and value scales.

If the Plot Time continues through the current time, the trend updates as information changes,
unless the length of the overall time period exceeds the limit set by your System
Administrator. The default limit is 7 days. This value is configurable.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

71

Visualize Data with Symbols

Create a Trend
1. Open a display.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click the Trend button

, or

Click Draw > Trend.


The mouse pointer changes to the Trend pointer.
3. Click in the display where you want to add the trend and drag the pointer to form a
rectangle into which the trend will be placed.
When you release the mouse button, the Define Trend (page 75) dialog box appears.

4. In the Plot box, type a name.


5. (Optional) Click the New Plot button if you want to build a trend with multiple plots
(page 74).
6. In the Tags in Plot box, type the name of the tag, or
Click the Tag Search button to locate a tag, or
Click the Tag Search arrow to see more search options:

72

Tag Search (page 153)


Historian Calculation (page 163) (data set)
ODBC (page 167) (data set)
AF2 (page 177) - launches the Select AF Attribute dialog box, from which you can
search an AF database for elements and attributes.
Element Relative - launches the Element Search dialog box from which you can
search an AF database for elements.

Trends

Your selections for tags, data sets, or attributes appear under Tags in Plot.
7. If you manually enter tag names, select the appropriate Historian Server from the Server
drop-down list. Normally, the default Historian Server is listed.
8. You can rearrange, add to, or delete the selected tags by clicking one of the buttons above
the Tags in Plot box.
9. If you have an ODBC dataset column with a Historian Tag placeholder or a Historian
Summary dataset column selected for the plot, the Custom Placeholder button is
enabled. Click the button to change the Historian Tag used as the placeholder for the
selected trace.
Note: FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook allows you to create custom placeholders
for a symbol based on a summary Data Set or a Historian Tag placeholder in
an ODBC data set. Placeholders are not allowed for expression Data Sets.
The Custom Placeholders button in symbol definition dialog boxes allows
you to specify different Historian Tags for a Historian Summary Data Set or
ODBC data set with a Historian Tag placeholder. The change applies only to
the configured symbol. See Add or Edit Placeholders (page 170) for details.

10. Under Scale, select Single Scale or, if you have more than one trace, you may select
Multiple Scales. The multiple scales option shows a value range for each trace. There is
only one time scale.
11. Consider checking the following check boxes:

Logarithmicto display the data in a logarithmic scale. If you have multiple scales,
you may set this option differently for each trace. This option is disabled for digital
tags.

Note: You may use logarithmic and non-logarithmic scales for traces in the same
trend when you select the Multiple Scales option. In this case, the minor grid
lines associated with a logarithmic plot may confuse the plot. You can turn off
the minor grid lines by setting the vertical minor grid color or line style to none.

Regression Linedetermines whether a regression line is drawn for a selected trace.

12. In the Max and Min drop-down lists, select Autorange or Database or enter the values
to determine the value scale range.
Min Settings:

AutorangeThe trend displays with the value scale starting at the closest available
major axis. If the minimum is Autorange and the maximum is not, the scale starts at
the lowest data value in the trace (not on a major axis) and ends on the closest major
axis.
DatabaseThe tag's Zero attribute is used to specify the minimum plot value. This
value can be negative is the value of the tag is negative.
0 (absolute value)The value you type is used as the first value on the value scale.

Max Settings:

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

73

Visualize Data with Symbols

AutorangeThe trend displays with the value scale ending at the closest available
major axis. If the maximum is Autorange and the minimum is not, the plot starts on
the minimum value and ends on the largest trace value (neither min nor max will be
on a major axis).
DatabaseThe tag's Zero + Span attributes are used to specify the maximum plot
value.
0 (absolute value)The value you type is used as the value scale maximum.

13. From the Format drop-down list, select the number format for the scale. Database is the
default format. This number format is also applied to legend, cursor, and ToolTip
numbers.

DatabaseDatabase format uses the displaydigits Historian Point attribute to


determine how many decimal places to show. If the length of the number exceeds the
displaydigits value, scientific notation is used. FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook trims trailing zeroes that follow a decimal point. The Database format
option is intended for use with Historian Tags only.
GeneralShows all significant digits for a number except trailing zeros. If the
absolute value of the value is greater than 1e+7 or less than 1e-5, the format will
switch to use scientific notation.
ScientificMost useful with very large numbers. The scientific format used for
trends displays in the format: 0.00E+00.
Custom (#,##0.00, 0%)Allows you to enter your own number format. See the
Table of Format Values for examples.

14. Under Plot Time, from the Start and End drop-down lists, select a time. An asterisk (*)
represents the current time. You can also manually enter a valid Historian Time (page
150) string.
15. In the Style drop-down list, select Full time stamp, Partial time stamp, or Relative
time stamp to indicate how time is displayed on the time axis.
16. Click OK.
Note: FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook allows you to create custom placeholders for a
symbol based on a summary Data Set or a Historian Tag placeholder in an ODBC
data set. Placeholders are not allowed for expression Data Sets. The Custom
Placeholders button in symbol definition dialog boxes allows you to specify
different Historian Tags for a Historian Summary Data Set or ODBC data set with
a Historian Tag placeholder. The change applies only to the configured symbol.
See Add or Edit Placeholders (page 170) for details.

Build a Trend with Multiple Plots


For new trend symbols, you can add multiple plots at the same time so that many trends are
created, configured and placed on the display without dragging additional symbols on the
display. Once the plots are created they are no longer associated in any way and are
configured, moved, and sized individually.

74

Trends

1. Follow the steps to create a trend (page 72).


2. To create additional plots, click the New Plot button and select tags. Repeat as necessary.
To view the tags you have selected, you can select each plot name in the Plot box.
3. To adjust the arrangement matrix for the plots you are creating, click the Layout tab
(page 78).
Note: These matrix options are available only when you create the trend and cannot
be edited later. However, you can revise the traces and other trend properties
on each plot individually.

Move a Plot
If you have created more than one plot in the trend, you can move each plot separately.
In Build mode simply click the plot you want to move. Selection handles appear around the
plot. Use these handles to drag the plot to its new location.
Delete a Plot within a Trend
1. In the Define Trend dialog box, click the General tab.
2. In the Plot drop-down list, select the plot you want to delete, and then click the Delete
Plot button. This button is only available while the symbol is being created.
Note: Once you have drawn a trend, and you want to delete a plot, you can select the
plot and then press DELETE.

Edit a Trend
Use the Define Trend (page 75) dialog box to edit an existing trend. To launch this dialog box
do one of the following:

In Build mode, double click a trend

Select a trend and click the Item Definition toolbar button

Select a trend and click Edit > Selected Item

Define Trend Dialog box


In the Define Trend dialog box, you can specify tags; the colors and line styles for traces,
legends, and backgrounds; and how much tag information is displayed with a trend. Use the
Symbol Formatting (page 54) toolbar to make color or line formatting or font changes.
Trends are formatted according to certain defaults. Using the Trend Preference settings (page
19), you can create your own default format for new trends. You can set options like line

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

75

Visualize Data with Symbols

colors, background, and marker shapes, and you can set the types of point information
included with a trend.
The Define Trend dialog box has a General tab where you create a trend (page 72), and the
following additional tabs for formatting and layout:

Display Formatoptions for the elements to be included in the trend.

Trace Formatprovides an alternate way to choose colors and line styles for each trace
(plot line) as well as the axes, background, and text.

Layoutoptions determine the arrangement of rows and columns for multiple plot
trends. This tab only appears when you first create a trend symbol.

Display Format Tab

Legend group boxcheck or uncheck options for displaying the tag name, server name,
description, value, and engineering units. Your choices are reflected in the sample trend at the
bottom of the dialog box.
The information that can fit in the legend is determined by the size of the trend.
Consequently, not all of the information in the legend may be visible.

76

If the width of the legend is more than 50 percent of the width of the trend, the legend
does not display.

Trends

If the length of the text in the legend is longer than the total height of the trend, the
items on the bottom are not shown.

Display group boxcheck or uncheck the following options. The sample trend reflects the
changes you make.

Plot Title
Vertical Scale Inside AxisDraws the value scale inside the plot area
GridsShows grid lines (page 83) on the trend
MarkersWhen checked, markers indicate data points on the trend. If the Markers
box is not selected, three markers appear on each line to help you match a line to a
tag.

Trend orientationchoose from the three radio button options at the top of the dialog box:
End Time at right (horizontal), End Time at top (vertical), or End Time at bottom
(vertical). This feature allows you to orient your trend in a horizontal or vertical direction.
Trace Format Tab
Use the buttons on the Symbol Formatting (page 54) toolbar to configure plot elements such
as pens (traces (page 86)), text, and background.
The Trace Format tab gives you an alternate way to update formatting changes.

Plot Element drop-down boxselect from a list of available traces and other plot elements.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

77

Visualize Data with Symbols

Element Format group boxselect formatting options for the selected plot element. Your
choices are reflected in the sample trend at the bottom of the dialog box.
Layout Tab
The plot arrangement in a multi-plot trend is established by setting up the number of rows
and columns of plots in the Layout tab.
Note: The Layout tab only appears when you initially create a trend (page 72). Once the
layout is set, you cannot revise it because the plots are no longer associated when
the symbol is created. However, individual plots can be moved on the display in
Build mode.

To revise the proposed plot arrangement matrix:


Under Plot Arrangement, select the number of rows and columns you want. The following
example shows four plots, to be arranged in 2 rows of 2 columns each. Tab past the matrix to
see the sample of your new selection display in the Preview area.

78

Trends

Configure Trend Scale


The Trend Scale dialog box provides easy access to the value scale settings for each tag in a
trend, SQC chart or XYPlot. If the plot uses a data set, only the Autorange and Absolute
options are available for the Maximum and Minimum scale settings.

1. In Run mode, double-click the plot's value scale to open the Trend Scale dialog box.
Note: In FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook you can also click View > Trend Scale.
This menu object is not available in FactoryTalk Historian ActiveView.

2. Select the Single Scale or Multiple Scales radio button.


3. If you are using multiple scales, then select the tag for which to set the scale options from
the Tags drop-down list.
4. Select Autorange, Database, or Absolute options for the Maximum and Minimum
values of the scale.

Autorange: sets the value scale using the minimum and maximum tag values
between the trend start time and end time.
Database: sets the value scale using the tag attribute values in the Point Database.
Zero is the minimum. Zero + Span is the maximum. See the FactoryTalk Historian
Server Reference Guide for more information on tag attributes.
Absolute: allows you to enter a custom value for the value scale of a tag. Enter the
value in the adjacent box.

5. If you have selected the Absolute option, then type in the Maximum and Minimum
values of the scale in the adjacent boxes.
6. Click OK.
Modifications made to a trend through use of this dialog box do not affect the stored settings
of the trend.
Note: To return the trend scale to its original settings, click Revert on the context menu.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

79

Visualize Data with Symbols

Trend Analysis Tools


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook provides a number of tools for analyzing or monitoring
the data in a trend, SQC chart, or XYPlot.

Trend Zoom (page 80)lets you use the mouse to drag a box around the data you would
like to see more detail.

Trend Expand (page 81)temporarily expands a trend symbol so that it occupies the
entire display window.

Trend Cursor (page 81)shows the value of the plotted tags at a specific point in time.

Drag Zoom
Drag Zoom lets you contract the time scale of a trend.
1. With the Run mode pointer, click an area in the trend at which you want a closer look.
2. Drag the pointer diagonally to create a rectangle.
3. When you release the mouse, the trend displays the data within the rectangle.
Trend Zoom 2x In or Out

Use the Zoom In or Out button at the bottom of a trend to reduce or expand the time range of
that trend by a factor of 2. In other words, if your time range is 8 hours, Trend Zoom 2x In
divides the time range by 2 and displays the trend for a 4 hour time period. Trend Zoom 2x
Out multiplies the time range by 2 and displays the trend for a 16 hour time period.
You can remove changes to the time range by clicking the Revert button

Note: If a trend is too small these buttons may not appear. Double-click a trend to
expand its size and display hidden buttons.

If there are no trend cursors, the Trend Zoom 2x command zooms in or out of the last
portion of the time period. For example, if the initial time range is 60 minutes and you select
Trend Zoom 2x In, the trend displays the last 30 minutes. Trend Zoom 2x Out displays 120
minutes adding 60 minutes to the beginning of the trend.
When a trend cursor is displayed, the command uses the trend cursor as the center of the
zoomed trend. If several cursors are used, the last one set is used as the center of the zoomed
trend. See Trend Cursor (page 81), for more information on trend cursors.

80

Trends

Expand a Trend
Double-click a trend in Run mode to redraw the trend so that it occupies the entire display
window. Double-click again to reduce the trend to its original size.
While the trend is expanded, the Drawing toolbar is disabled. If you switch to another
display, the Drawing toolbar will work there. All descriptive information (title, tag
descriptor, tag value) is shown on an expanded trend.
Trend Cursor

A trend cursor lets you read tag values for a particular time. When you select a trend cursor, a
vertical line indicates the cursor position. The box at the top of the line indicates the value
and status. The box at the bottom displays the time and date of the value. On verticallyoriented trends the cursor is horizontally oriented.
You may display several trend cursors at one time.
Note: A trend does not update while trend cursors are visible.

If the trend is too small, the Trend Cursor command is disabled and the mouse pointer does
not change when you move over the left axis. You can expand the trend by double-clicking it.
Trend cursors may be automated.
Add a Trend Cursor
1. Notice whether the time scale appears at the bottom and the timestamp appears at the
upper right. If not, the trend rectangle may be too small to use Trend Cursor. Enlarge the
trend. If the time stamp does not appear, reformat the display format to show it.
2. With the Run mode pointer, click the Trend Cursor button
. A cursor appears at the
right edge of the trend. When the mouse pointer changes to a double-headed arrow over
the trend cursor, click the vertical line and drag left to position the trend cursor, or
Click View > Trend Cursor. An indented icon in front of the command indicates that
trend cursors are on.
3. Move the mouse pointer over the left axis of the trend. The pointer changes to a trend
cursor symbol. As you drag to the right, a new trend cursor is added to the trend
4. Move the trend cursor back and forth across the trend by dragging it. As you move it, the
time stamp, status, and value appear in a box at the top right of the trend.
5. When you release the cursor, the values appear in boxes at the top and bottom of the
cursor. You can add additional cursors by grabbing the trend cursor icon at the left axis.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

81

Visualize Data with Symbols

Remove a Trend Cursor


Click the Trend Cursor button

-orClick View > Trend Cursor,


-orRevert the trend.
Note: To remove one trend cursor but not all of them, click the trend cursor and drag it to
the left or right until it moves off of the trend.

Change Time Range

Scroll time ranges directly on a trend by using the Step Forward or Backward buttons
on the time scale. These time changes are not saved with the symbol.

Use the Revert button


configured settings.

, located next to the time scale, to return the trend to its

Note: If the trend is too small these buttons may not appear. Expand the trend's size to
display hidden buttons.

You can also use buttons on the Time Range (page 64) toolbar to modify time
configurations settings.

How Trends Refresh


If the end time of the trend is current (*) or future (for example, *+1h), and trend cursors are
off, then the trend updates whenever information is sent from the machine instrumentation to
the Historian Server at a configurable update rate (5 seconds by default).
A dashed line on the plot time grid of the trend indicates the current time and that the plot is
updating. If the information has not changed at the instrumentation sensor, the trend shows a
flat line from the last update to the current time (the dotted line).
You can force a refresh by clicking the Revert button.
Note: If desired, a FactoryTalk Historian System Manager can change the seven-day
updating time range limit to another interval on your computer.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook uses an algorithm to identify the peaks and valleys of
data values so that no information is lost when the trend time range is large. It ensures that the
plot is not under- or over-sampled and that the correct amount of information is sent from the
Historian Archive.

82

Trends

Unlike data from a Historian Server, data from an ODBC data set refreshes according to a
configured refresh rate.

Trend Appearance
A trend appears according to the format established in the Preference settings (page 19). You
may override this format by selecting the Trend Formatting (page 76) button

Typically, the title of the trend appears at the upper left, and the current timestamp appears at
the upper right. The selected tag names, current or end value, and engineering units appear in
the legend opposite the value scale.
Grid Lines and Labels
Trends are formatted according to certain defaults. Use the Trend Elements (page 20) tab in
the ProcessBook Preferences dialog box to create default formats for new trends. You can
set options like line colors and marker shapes, and set the types of point information included
with a trend.
Grid Lines
Horizontal and vertical grid lines align with even units (whole numbers) on the scales. Grid
lines for the value scale line up with whole numbers at intervals of 1, 2, 5, 10, or powers of
10 times those intervals. Grid lines for the time scale line up with time intervals such as
weeks, days, hours, minutes, etc. The traces then scroll as time passes on an updating trend.
Grid Line Labels
Configure the labels for the value scale using single or multiple scales. You can place these
labels on either the inside or outside of the value axis:
Single Scale

The union of the ranges for all traces appears in the label.

Multiple Scales

The range for each trace in the trend appears in the label.

Configure the labels for the time axis using a full timestamp, partial timestamp, or a relative
timestamp:
Full timestamp

Displays a complete timestamp for the start and end times. The time range of
the trend is in the middle of the time axis.

Partial timestamp

Labels most grid lines in the units of the time range. Displays the full timestamp
for the end time of the trend at the top right edge of the plot.

Relative
timestamp

Displays the offset from the end time limit in weeks, days, hours, etc. and the
full timestamp for the end time of the trend at the top right edge of the plot.

Note: Labels for the grid lines appear unless the trend rectangle is too small.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

83

Visualize Data with Symbols

Value Scale Grid Lines


Grid lines are shown in value scale intervals of 1, 2, 5, 10, or powers of 10 times those
intervals.
The value axis minimum and maximum are set using one of four methods:

Autorange scale

Database scale

Logarithmic scale

Manually Defined scale

Autorange Scale
The value scale is determined by a calculation based on minimum and maximum values in
the trend. As new data are received from the server, the high and low values may change, and
the scale is recalculated accordingly.
For example, if the original scale ranged from 5 to 100, but the new data has a high of 103,
then the new plot shows a range from 5 to 105 (the nearest number divisible by 5 and larger
than the high value).
If more than one tag is plotted on a single scale, the value scale is calculated from the highest
and lowest values for all the tags.
Database Scale
If the scale is set to Database, the range is the same as the limits for the point on the server.
The minimum value is termed zero, and the maximum value is the sum of the zero value plus
the span value.
For example, suppose the tag attributes for a point are Zero = 3 and Span = 6. The plot range
therefore is based on making the minimum and maximum values 3 to 9.
Logarithmic Scale
If you prefer a logarithmic scale, check this option. This option is disabled for digital, string,
or timestamp tags.
Manually Defined Scale
When the scale is configured, an arbitrary minimum and maximum scale value may be
entered.
Single and Multiple Scales for the Vertical Axis
Value scales are labeled whenever there is enough room. Configure these labels with either
single or multiple scales.

84

For a single scale label, the union of the ranges for all traces appears.

Trends

For multiple scale labels, the range for the first trace appears next to the value axis.
Ranges for the other traces appear in increasing distance from the axis in the order the
tags are listed in the trend legend.

Note: On a single scale trend, traces that contain only one value (a flat line) or have no
data are governed by special scaling rules. When a trend is composed of only flat
or no data traces, the default value scale range is inflated to prevent showing a flat
plot area. These default ranges are not applied if the trace in question is on a
single scale trend that contains other visible traces that do not fall into either of the
aforementioned categories.

A single scale trace containing one flat trace with a constant value of 0.

A single scale trend containing a flat trace and a non-flat trace. The default range for the flat
trace is not applied.

Time Scale Grid Lines


Grid lines for the time scale line up with whole units of time, such as days, hours, minutes,
etc. On a trend that receives updates, traces scroll as time passes. For an updating trend, the
current time is indicated by a dotted vertical line.
Configure labels for the time axis in one of three ways:

Full Timestamplabels the start and end time limits with the date and time. When
space permits, the elapsed time between these lines is also shown.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

85

Visualize Data with Symbols

Partial Timestamplabels each grid line in whole units, such as hours. For example,
the grid lines might be labeled 9:00, 10:00, and 11:00. A full timestamp showing the plot
end time is shown at the upper right.

Relative Timestamplabels each grid line with the amount of time preceding the end
time limit in days, hours, minutes, or seconds. For example, the grid lines might be
labeled -4, -3, - 2, -1, meaning 4, 3, 2, and 1 hours before the end time. A full timestamp
for the end time is shown at the upper right.

Traces
A trace is a single line on a trend. When a trace is continuous, a line is drawn from
measurement to measurement. When a trace is discrete, the value is propagated forward until
a new value is recorded in the database. This results in horizontal and vertical lines for the tag
(staircase trace).
Digital points are discrete type measurements, producing staircase traces. For digital points,
the offset from the starting digital state code is plotted.
Staircase traces are used for points from a Historian Server that have a Step Flag set to
TRUE.
ODBC queries may produce either curved or staircase traces, depending on the Stepped Plot
check box setting in the ODBC Data Set dialog box.
Hide Traces
You can hide one or more traces on the trend in Run mode so that an area of concern is more
easily viewed.
1. Open a trend in Run mode.
2. Hover your mouse pointer over the trend's legend. The mouse pointer changes to a hand
cursor

, and the trace in the trend is highlighted.

3. Click on the legend item to hide or show the trace on the plot. If the trace has a regression
line configured, the regression line is also hidden. When a trace is hidden:

the trace name is dimmed in the legend and the description, value, and engineering
units are hidden (if they were shown before).
the space reserved on the legend for the description, value, and engineering units
collapses so that the trace under the hidden trace is moved. This clearly shows the
visible traces on the legend, especially on a trend with many traces.
on a multi-scale trend, the scale associated with the hidden trace is hidden.
on a single scale trend, the minimum and maximum values shown on the scale may
be adjusted.

You can show hidden traces by clicking their names a second time in the legend, or by
clicking the Revert button. All hidden traces are shown in Build mode.
Note: You can also right click on a trend and select Show All or Hide All to make traces
visible or invisible.

86

Trends

Markers
Markers indicate data points and allow you to differentiate between traces on a trend. There
are three types of markers:

actual data

trace markers

bad data markers

At least three markers are shown on a trace, unless the plot is too small.
Actual Data Markers
Actual data markers plot each value stored in the database. The color of the trace and of the
marker is the same. You can select the shape of the marker, such as diamonds, circles,
squares, or triangles, which can be helpful for color- blind users and for monochrome
monitors.
Trace Markers
If there are too many values to plot based on the size of the trend, the display resolution and
the density of the plotted data, actual data markers do not appear and trace markers are used
instead. Trace markers are also used if the trend configuration does not specify Markers.
Trace markers help you identify the legend information for each trace; they do not indicate
actual plot values. Up to three trace markers are used per trace.
X Markers
When a value is outside the limits defined for the trend, it is plotted as over- or under-range.
When a value is out of range or has a bad value, it is not shown on the plot. An X marker is
placed on the trend at the beginning and end of the time when data are not plotted. When the
data are missing, (for example, not connected to a server) they are given the value No Data
and are not plotted.

Ad Hoc Trends
Create a trend on an ad hoc basis for tags represented by dynamic symbols in a display within
a ProcessBook.
Ad hoc trends are like any other trends in that you can scroll the time forward and backward,
view cursors, zoom, view point attributes, use multiple scales, or change the time range.
To create an ad hoc trend, use either:

Trend tool
to add a trend to an existing display pre-configured with data from other
symbols on the display.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

87

Visualize Data with Symbols

Trend Display tool


to create a separate, new display with a trend pre-configured
with data from symbols on the original display.

Note: You can build a trend display before you open any displays.

If you create an ad hoc trend display and then choose to save it for future use, it appears on
the Book or Outline View as subordinate to the original display.
Create an Ad Hoc Trend
To create an ad hoc trend for a specific tag or tags:
1. In Run mode, select the dynamic symbol(s) with the data you want to trend, such as a
bar, value, or Multi-State symbol. To select more than one dynamic symbol, hold down
the Shift key while you click them.
2. Click the Trend Display button

A new display window opens, and a trend is created automatically for the selected
symbols using the default format and time range. It is given the unique name Trend
Display#, where # is a number. The plot title is Ad Hoc Trend.
- or Click the Trend button
. The mouse pointer changes to a trend pointer. Click in the
display and drag to create a rectangle. It is given the name Ad Hoc Trend.
The trend appears in the rectangle, using the default format.
Note: If you select more tags than the default set in your Preference settings, usually 3,
then you will have more than one plot in your trend or trend display.

Save an Ad Hoc Trend Display


If you create an ad hoc trend display and wish to save it for future use, then you must use the
Save or Save As command before you close the instant trend. There are several options:

Save an ad hoc trend display as an independent display by clicking it and using the Save
As command with a .pdi filename extension.

If you had a display entry from a ProcessBook open when the instant trend was created,
the instant trend can be saved as a subordinate of the display by using the Save
command.

You may save an ad hoc trend as another file type, such as a bitmap (.bmp) file, using
Save As.

Note: You cannot save an ad hoc trend from view-only mode.

88

Trends

OpenVMS Trends and Graphics


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook allows you to convert your existing OpenVMS trend and
graphic files for use within a ProcessBook. Specifically, the following types of files are
supported:

PIDisDIFF filescontain trend graphs built using the FactoryTalk Historian data
Trending Package. You can convert horizontal, vertical, composite, and overview trends.

Historian-GP filesgraphic files built using the Historian-GP Graphics Builder.

Before you can convert your trend files (PIDisDIFF), you must convert them as ASCII text
files on the VAX and then download them to your PC.
Once the files are on the PC, you can import them to a ProcessBook. Trends are formatted
based on the settings on the Trend Elements tab in the ProcessBook Preference dialog box.
Convert Trends
This process is used to convert VAX graphics for use with a PC.
1. On the VAX or Alpha at the DCL prompt, type $

Run PISysExe:PIDisDIFF

2. Select option 1 List Master Display Library from the ProcessBook Display Data
Interchange File Format Builder.
3. Direct the output to a file.
4. Enter a file name. If your file name is more than 8 characters and a 3-character extension
(xxxxxxxx.xxx), the name is truncated during the download process.
5. Accept the defaults for display mask, group numbers and unit numbers (*).
6. Select the trend display types you are importing. For optimum performance select only
options 1 (horizontal), 2 (vertical), 3 (composite), and 8 (overview).
7. Quit the PIDisDIFF application (option Q).
8. Transfer the file from the VAX or Alpha to the PC using any ASCII text file transfer
program you have available.
Convert Graphics
This process is used to convert VAX graphics for use with a PC.
On the OpenVMS computer, copy a graphic file to your working directory. Graphic files are
named PISysDat:PIGP_xxxxxxxxxx.dat, where xxxxxxxxxx is the display
name.
1. At the DCL prompt, type $

RUN PISysExe:GPAB

2. Select option 1 Convert Binary to ASCII from the Historian Graphics Package
ASCII/Binary File Conversion menu.
3. Type the display name of the graphic you want to convert and press Enter. Repeat for
each file you want to convert.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

89

Visualize Data with Symbols

4. Select option Q to quit the application.


5. Transfer the file from the VAX or Alpha to the PC using any ASCII text file transfer
program you have available.
Your FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook installation DVD includes an OpenVMS command

Chapter
file which performs Steps 1 - 5 for all graphics. The file is named GPPBConv.com.

XYPlots
An XYPlot shows a correlation between one or more paired sets of data. On an XYPlot (also
called a scatter plot), the X scale shows possible values for one of the items in the pair and
the Y scale shows the value of the other item in the pair. A basic scatter plot looks like the
following:

Uncorrelated data

This case plotted 10-minute intervals of two points, A and B, for the last hour. Point A had 12
point values; Point B had 16 point values. The number of points plotted equals the number of
pairs. Since A had fewer point values, the plot shows only 12 point pairs. The extra data from
point B is ignored. You can configure the method by which pairing occurs.
Correlation is a measure of the strength of the relationship between two variables. Correlation
is indicated graphically by the spread of the data points around a fitted straight line (for
example, a straight line that indicates the trend of the data). In general, the closer the points
are to the fitted line, the stronger the correlation. The two Historian tags shown in figure 1 are
not strongly correlated. Another plot shows perfectly correlated data:

90

XYPlots

Perfectly correlated

A third plot is somewhat correlated:

Somewhat correlated

In the case of the third plot, a regression line with a slope (M) of 1 and an offset (B) of 0
drawn diagonally across the plot would show all points lying close to the line, some above it,
some below it. This line formula is appropriate in this case because both scales are the same
and the points appear to have values very close to each other. In other cases, one value may
be two or three times the other value (for example) and the regression line would fall on a
different slope, depending upon how the scales are configured. If the scales are the same, the
slope of the line determines the relationship between the points. If the scales are not the same,
the slope is insignificant.

Draw an XYPlot
1. In Build mode, click Draw > XYPlot,
-orOn the Drawing toolbar, click the XYPlot button
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

.
91

Visualize Data with Symbols

2. Drag a rectangle on the display to create the boundaries.


3. Release the mouse button.
The Define XYPlot dialog box opens with the General tab open. Use the tabs to:

General Tab (page 92)Select tags to be plotted.


Display Format Tab (page 96)Choose what to show in the Legend and on the
Display.
Plot Format Tab (page 97)Select how to color and style the plot elements, such as
trace pens and background.

4. Click OK. The XYPlot appears.


To revise an existing XYPlot, select Build mode and double-click the XYPlot. The Define
XYPlot dialog box appears. Make your changes and click OK.
Note: Click Undo to restore your original plot.

General Tab
Use the General tab to select data items to plot.

92

Plot TitleEnter a plot title. Change it later if you wish.

Tags in PlotSelect the tags or data sets you want to plot.

XYPlots

Click the Tag Search button to locate a tag, or


Click the Tag Search arrow to see more search options:

Tag Search (page 153)


Historian Calculation (page 163) (data set)
ODBC (page 167) (data set)
AF2 (page 177) - launches the Select AF Attribute dialog box, from which you can
search an AF database for elements and attributes.
Element Relative - launches the Element Search dialog box from which you can
search an AF database for elements.

Your selections for tags, data sets, or attributes appear under Tags in Plot. An Options
radio button appears next to each tag name.

Select the Options radio button to choose the X-axis tag. Unselected tags are Y-axis
tags.
If a tag that is selected as the X-axis is deleted, the first tag in the list becomes the X-axis
tag.
Use the four toolbar buttons on the title bar to rearrange this list. They are, in order, Add,
Delete, Up Arrow, and Down Arrow.

ServerEnter or select a Historian Server name. This field is only used when a
Historian Tag name is typed directly into the list.

Note: FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook allows you to create custom placeholders for a
symbol based on a summary Data Set or a Historian Tag placeholder in an ODBC
data set. Placeholders are not allowed for expression Data Sets. The Custom
Placeholders button in symbol definition dialog boxes allows you to specify
different Historian Tags for a Historian Summary Data Set or ODBC data set with
a Historian Tag placeholder. The change applies only to the configured symbol.
See Add or Edit Placeholders (page 170) for details.

Configure Pairings
Once the tags are listed in the Tags in Plot list, configure the method for pairing values
between X and Y in the Data Retrieval Methods box.

X Tagchoose either Recorded or Interpolated for the retrieval method.


Interpolatedan interval may be entered in the Plot Time section. Interpolated is
the default for tags and is disabled for ODBC and Custom data sets. This method
retrieves interpolated values for the specified time range in regular intervals. For
example, if the time range is *-1h to * and the Interval is 10m, then six values spaced
10 minutes apart are returned. This option provides a way to get evenly sampled data.
RecordedRetrieves archive values between the specified start and end time.

Y Tag(s)the Y tag data retrieval method applies to individually selected tags in the
Tags in Plot list (unless the Use for all Y tags check box is selected). The default data
retrieval method for Y tags is Synchronize.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

93

Visualize Data with Symbols

Y Tags, paired by position in the listTo use multiple time ranges, select Recorded or
Interpolated. In this case, data is paired by position in the point list. If Interpolated is
selected for the X tag as well, the interval value for the Y tag defaults to the one for the X
tag.
When Recorded is the retrieval mechanism, the results are not skewed by minor
timestamp differences.

Y Tags, paired by timestampsto pair values by time, rather than by list position,
choose one of these retrieval methods: Synchronize, Match, Match or Previous, or
Match or Next.
Synchronizesynchronizes data found for X with data for Y using the timestamps
for the X data. This may result in interpolated data values for Y.
Matchfind the event for Y corresponding to the exact timestamp as X. If no
matching event is found, no match is made for that X value.
Match or Previousfind the event for Y corresponding to the exact timestamp as
X. If there is none, find the event that is the closest but earlier in time.
Match or Nextfind the event for Y corresponding to the exact timestamp as X. If
there is none, find the event that is the closest, but later in time.
Synchronize and Matchuse different PI SDK value retrieval methods. Synchronize
uses TimedValues. Match uses RecordedValues and then uses the values where the
timestamps match.
Note: Synchronize is disabled for ODBC and Custom data sets.

If you select Synchronize or any of the Match options, the start and end times for that
tag are set the same as for the X tag and cannot be changed.
Note: The XYPlot supports ODBC data sets that don't contain timestamps. This type
of entry must be plotted as a Y-tag, and data values must be retrieved using
the Recorded retrieval method. If a tag is changed from a Y tag to an X tag
and has a value for Retrieval Method that is only valid for Y tags, the method
is changed to Interpolated. If the tag is a data set, the method is changed to
Recorded.

In all cases, if a pair is not made, the unmatched X or Y events are ignored.

Use for all Y tagsSelecting this box indicates that the Y-tags data retrieval mechanism
applies for all Y-tags. If one of the tags is a Custom or ODBC data set and the selection
mechanism is Interpolated or Synchronize, the selection mechanism will be Recorded
or Match respectively for that tag only.

Scale Box
In the Scale Box, set the scale ranges for all tags.

94

Single Y Scalecombines all Y tag value ranges onto one scale.

Multiple Y Scalesprovides a separate scale for each Y tag. This choice does not
change the scale min and max values, but allows them to be configured independently by
selecting each Y tag and making changes.

XYPlots

Regardless of your selection, you may independently configure the X scale tag.

MaxAutorange uses the maximum value plotted. You may enter an absolute value here
as well. Default is Autorange. Database uses the zero plus span value of the tag in the
Historian Server to determine the max. Database with a data set plot uses the maximum
value plotted.

MinAutorange uses the minimum value plotted. You may enter an absolute value here
as well. Default is Autorange. Database uses the zero value of the tag in the Historian
Server to determine the min. Database with a data set plot uses the minimum value
plotted.

FormatSelects the number format of the Y scale, legend entries, cursor values, and
ToolTip values:
DatabaseDatabase format uses the displaydigits Historian Point attribute to
determine how many decimal places to show. If the length of the number exceeds the
displaydigits value, scientific notation is used. FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook trims trailing zeroes that follow a decimal point. The Database format
option is intended for use with Historian Tags only.
GeneralShows all significant digits for a number except trailing zeros. If the
absolute value of the value is greater than 1e+7 or less than 1e-5, the format will
switch to use scientific notation.
ScientificMost useful with very large numbers. The scientific format used for
trends displays in the format: 0.00E+00.
Custom (#,##0.00, 0%)Allows you to enter your own number format. See the
Table of Format Values for examples.

Plot Time
You can set the time for each tag as it is highlighted in the Tags in Plot box. If a Y tag is
selected and its selection mechanism is not Recorded or Interpolated, then these boxes are
disabled.

StartThe start time of the selected tag. The list includes *-1h (minus one hour), *-4h,
*-8h, *-1d, *-7d. The default is *-8h.

EndThe end time of the selected tag. The list includes *, *-1h, *-4h, *-8h, *-1d, *-7d.
The default is * (current time).

IntervalThis field is enabled when the retrieval method is Interpolated. It provides a


sampling interval for data.

When you have completed configuring the fields on the General tab, click the Display
Format (page 96) tab.
Add a Data set to an XYPlot
1. In Build mode, click Draw > XYPlot,
-orOn the Drawing toolbar, click the XYPlot button

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

95

Visualize Data with Symbols

2. Drag a rectangle on the display to create the boundaries.


3. Release the mouse button.
The Define XYPlot dialog box opens with the General tab open.
4. Click the arrow next to the Tag Search button.
5. Select ODBC or PI Calculation to see the corresponding Dataset Details or PI
Calculation Data configuration dialog box.
6. When you have completed the configuration, click OK to exit the configuration dialog
box. The data set name appears in the Tags in Plot box.
7. In the Define XYPlot dialog box, click OK to see the plot.
Display Format Tab
Use the Display Format tab to select options to show for an XY Plot legend and display.

Legend

96

Tag NameLists the entries in Tags in Plot. Selected by default.

Srvr NameSelect this check box to prepend the tag name with the server name.
Cleared by default.

DescriptionThe tag description may be displayed on the legend. Selected by default.

XYPlots

ValueThe last value of the tag plotted may be displayed. For digital and string tags, a
string value is shown. Selected by default.

Engineering UnitsSelected by default. If the tag does not report units, they are not
shown on the legend for that tag.

Correlation CoefficientA check indicates that the correlation coefficient should be


calculated and displayed on the legend. Selected by default.

Display

Plot TitleSelected by default.

Vertical Scale Inside AxisCheck this box to show the vertical scale to the right of the
Vertical Axis, inside the plot area. Selected by default.

GridsCheck this box to include vertical and horizontal grid lines. Selected by default.
On the Plot Format Page, you can configure the appearance of the major and minor grid
lines.

Linear Correlation LineCheck this to show a linear regression line. The default is
cleared, which does not draw a line.

Connecting LinesCheck this box to show the paired points connected with straight
lines in the order they are plotted. Selected by default. Clear the box to configure a scatter
plot with points only, no lines.

The Sample area displays a sample XYPlot with the options you have selected. When you
have completed the Display Format page, click the tab for the Plot Format page.
Plot Format Tab
Use the Plot Format tab of the Define XYPlot dialog box to select colors and styles for the
various elements of your plot.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

97

Visualize Data with Symbols

98

Plot Elementdrop-down list of the elements you can configure, such as major and
minor gridlines, background colors, text font, etc. Pens correspond to the X-and Y tags
listed in the order in the Tags in Plot box on the General tab.

Element FormatAfter you select an element in the Plot Element drop-down,


available formatting options appear. A drop-down arrow is grayed out if the option is not
configurable. For example, text has color but no line style options.
Line StyleDetermines the line style for the selected element.
Line WeightDetermines the line weight for the selected element. If the selected
element does not have a line weight property, this field is disabled.
Marker ShapeDetermines the marker shape for pen elements.
ColorDetermines the color for the selected element. Pen elements apply the color
to the line and marker.
Last Marker ColorAllows selection of a different color for the last marker for a
pen. If Match Trace is true (selected), this field is disabled. If the selected element
does not have a marker, this field is disabled.
Next To Last Marker ColorAllows selection of a different color for the secondto-last marker for a pen. If Match Trace is true (selected), this field is disabled. If the
selected element does not have a marker, this field is disabled.
Match TraceDetermines whether all marker colors match the trace color (true) for
a pen. If set to false, the Last Marker Color and Next To Last Marker Color fields
are enabled so the marker color can be changed for those two plotted pairs. By
default, this field is selected (true). If the selected element does not have a marker,
this field is disabled.

XYPlots

SampleProvides a preview of your formatting changes.

Ad hoc XYPlots
You can draw an XYPlot in Run mode on an ad hoc basis. Click the XYPlot button
begin, and follow the steps described in Drawing an XYPlot (page 91).

to

XYPlot Statistics
The XYPlot Statistics dialog box allows you to view and export raw data values and
statistics, such as the mean and standard deviation of each tags data. You can also view these
statistics in the Details Window (page 127) in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.
1. In Run mode, double-click the XYPlot symbol. The Statistics dialog box appears.
2. In the Options drop-down list, select Raw Data or Statistics.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

99

Visualize Data with Symbols

3. (optional) To save this data to a text file, click the Save Data to File button. The data is
saved to the file in the following format:
Tag, <tag name>
Start Time, <start time>
End Time, <end time>
Count, < number of points paired>
Mean, <mean>
STDEV, <standard deviation>
Data Type, <data type>
Index, Time, Value, Status
<index>, <time>, <value>, <status>
<index>, <time>, <value>, <status>

Tag, <tag name>


Start Time, <start time>
End Time, <end time>
Count, < number of points paired>
Mean, <mean>
STDEV, <standard deviation>
Correlation, <correlation coefficient>

100

XYPlots

Slope, <slope>
Intercept, <intercept>
Data Type, <data type>
Index, Time, Value, Status
<index>, <time>, <value>, <status>
<index>, <time>, <value>, <status>

Linear Regression by Least Squares


The best-fit linear regression line is a straight line that attempts to summarize the trend of the
plotted pairs. This line may be shown on the XYPlot.
The best-fit line has the formula:

Where m is the slope and b is the offset. To calculate m, we use the following equation:

To calculate b, the following equation is used:

Once m and b are known, the value of y that intersects the best-fit line can be calculated.

Correlation Coefficient
The Correlation Coefficient (r) varies between -1 and +1. Positive values indicate that as X
increases, Y also increases. Negative values indicate that as X increases, Y decreases. A
value of zero indicates no correlation in the way the sets of values vary.
The Correlation Coefficient for a set of points is calculated using the following formula: (n is
the number of points, s is the standard deviation). You can display the correlation coefficient
in the plot legend.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

101

Visualize Data with Symbols

Note: Bad data points are not included in this calculation.

Standard deviation(s) is calculated using the following formula:

The mean is the arithmetic average.

Interpreting an XYPlot
In FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook the XYPlot is a dynamic symbol. It has specialized
characteristics, such as its statistical calculations, which are described in the following
paragraphs.

Point Properties
Data may be retrieved from Historian or from independent data sets. Use the Tag Properties
button or the right mouse menu Properties item to determine the attributes of the points in
your XYPlot.
Scroll Feature
Scrolling is available from the ProcessBook toolbar. When time scrolling is used on an
XYPlot symbol, all tags time ranges are changed to support the scroll duration.
Plot Values
In a typical XYPlot, the current name for the X tag appears below the plot. The current names
for the different Y tags appear at the upper right. Below each one is the correlation coefficient
for that XY pair. The dots and lines on the plot are colored to match the tag names.
Plotted pair values appear in a ToolTip over the plot when the mouse cursor is hovering over
an actual plotted point pair. The following illustration shows an example.

102

XYPlots

In the figure above, if there had been more than one Y tag, each one would be displayed on a
different line. The X tag information is placed at the bottom. For digital or string tags, the text
value is displayed in the ToolTip.
You can also view plot values by double-clicking the title bar and choosing the Raw Data
option, rather than the Statistics option in the Statistics dialog box.

Zoom/Revert Functions
You can enlarge a portion of an XYPlot by using the Zoom feature.
Enlarge the whole plot to fill the display window
1. In Run mode, double-click the plot.
2. To reduce the plot to its original size, double-click it again. It does not update while
enlarged.
Enlarge a small area of the plot
1. Place the mouse cursor on the upper left corner of the area to be zoomed.
2. Hold the left mouse button down while dragging a rectangle to cover the appropriate
area. When you release the mouse, this area is enlarged to the borders of the original plot.

Original plot

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

103

Visualize Data with Symbols

Drag Zoom Completed

Note: The zoom area must be smaller than the plot area and cannot include the
outer 20 percent of the plot. If the mouse is dragged past the plot boundary,
the zoom rectangle stops at the border until the mouse reappears within the
boundary. If the mouse is dragged off the plot symbol boundary, the zoom is
canceled.

Revert
1. Click Undo to return the plot to its state directly before the zoom occurred.
2. Click the Revert button

to return the plot to its configured appearance.

Change Time Range Feature


1. Click View > Time Range.
-orOn the Time Range toolbar, click the Change Time Range button

The Change Time Range dialog box opens.


2. Enter new values in the Time Span box.
All tags are affected when you change the range in this dialog box.
3. Click the Revert (page 64) button on the Time Range tool bar
its configured appearance.

104

to return the plot to

XYPlots

XYPlot Cursors
The cursor for an XYPlot includes both a horizontal and a vertical line. The mouse cursor is
at the cross point of both cursor lines. You must be in Run mode to use the XYPlot cursor.
To create a cursor, place the mouse very close to either the X- or Y-axis. Drag the cursor onto
the plot.
In the XYPlot below, you can see an XYPlot cursor at the Y axis that is not yet intersecting
any points on the plot.

You can also see an XYPlot cursor that was dropped on a point. The X and Y values appear
in small boxes outside the axes.
Using the mouse, you may position and release the cursor over any pair on the XYPlot. If the
cursor is dropped on an area that contains no points, the cursor snaps to the nearest pair.
Move the XYCursor from Point to Point
Once you have dropped an XYCursor on a point, use the arrow keys to move from point to
point in time order. For example, pressing the right arrow key moves the cursor to the pair
that is plotted immediately after the current pair in the same series. The left arrow moves the
cursor to the pair that is plotted immediately before the current pair in the same series. The up
arrow moves the cursor to the first pair in the previous series. The down arrow moves the
cursor to the first pair in the next series. The cursor looks the same when it is dropped.
The information on the XYCursor point pair is shown in a box on each axis. If the tags are
digital or string, the text value is shown in the box rather than a numeric value. Placing the
mouse cursor over one of the cursor boxes shows the time of the event.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

105

Visualize Data with Symbols

Bad Status Indicators


If a single point of a pair contains a bad status, an X appears on the axis of the good point at
its value. If both points of a pair contain bad statuses, an X appears at the origin of the plot.
The XYPlot symbol supports Questionable, Annotated, and Substituted indicators.

Out of Range Indicators


When a point on the XYPlot falls above or below the X or Y scale range, it is not visible.
This may be because the plot is zoomed or because the scales have been set within a certain
range that does not cover the actual data.
In order to indicate there is a point outside of the visible area, an X is used. By default, a
straight line connects the points in the order that they are plotted. This line attempts to
connect hidden points as well. An X is placed at each position where this line crosses the top
or bottom of the plot area.

Too Many Points


When an X Tag has too many points to show on the plot, you receive and error message and
no points are shown. The maximum number is 10,000 points.

Examples of XYPlots
For these examples, the X-axis represents one of the values in the pair and the Y-axis
represents the other. The configuration of these axes regarding minimum and maximum
values and interval (or unit) settings is left to you.
Example 1: Create an XYPlot on a display in FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook to compare values for two Historian tags
1. On the Drawing toolbar, click the XYPlot button and drag to form the bounding
rectangle for the plot. The Define XYPlot dialog box appears.
2. Enter a title for the plot and select 2 tags to be entered in the Tags in Plot list.
3. Click an option button to select one tag to be the X tag.
4. Use the default settings for time range, scale, and retrieval method.
5. Click the Display Format tab and check the box for the regression line.
6. Select the Plot Format tab and accept the default values.
7. Click OK and the plot appears.

106

XYPlots

Example 2: Compare different tags to help optimize equipment performance


For example, suppose an engineer has just completed some optimization work on Boiler1,
one of the four boilers in the plant. He wants to optimize the other three boilers (Boiler2,
Boiler3, and Boiler4) so that they perform at the same level. After adjusting the three boilers,
he wants to see how closely they perform to the optimized Boiler1.
Assume that all four boilers run identical processes.
1. Plot the temperature of Boiler1 (the B1Temp tag) on the X-axis of an XYPlot and the
temperatures of the other three boilers (B2Temp, B3Temp and B4Temp) on the Y-axis.
2. Use the same time range for all four tags.
3. Select a single scale so that the Boilers 2, 3 and 4 are compared directly against Boiler1.
4. Configure the plot to show the correlation co-efficient for each of the boilers.
By viewing how far from the regression line each of the boilers falls, you can determine how
closely their performance matches and which boilers you should continue to adjust. When all
three boilers have an acceptable correlation coefficient, you know the work is complete.
Example 3: Lab Comparisons
An engineer wants to compare lab results from his lab to those of another lab for the same
sample of material.
The plant's quality assurance lab has instituted some new testing procedures. In order to
gauge the validity of the new testing procedures, an engineer wants to compare results from
the new process against data from an outside lab that is known to have valid testing
procedures.
1. Put the results from the in-house lab into a data set.
2. Place the results for the same test from the other lab into another data set.
3. Selects each data set as a tag in the plot, and select which one to be the X-axis.
4. Choose Recorded as the retrieval mechanism for each data set so that the results are not
skewed by minor timestamp differences.
If the XYPlot shows the results from the new process are well correlated with the outside
lab's data, the new test procedure is validated.
Example 4: Comparing a Batch Run to a Standard
An engineer wants to compare sample measurements taken from one Batch run and compare
them to a fixed set of measurements he knows to be desirable.
1. Select the fixed set of measurements by choosing the appropriate tag or data set and
indicating it is to be used for the X-axis.
2. Select the appropriate tags for the comparison batches, entering their specific time ranges.
3. Use Recorded values for all retrieval mechanisms.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

107

Visualize Data with Symbols

The data points are paired according to their position in the events list. The XYPlot shows
how closely the results are correlated by how closely the pairs fall on a linear regression line.
Pairs that fall outside this line may indicate problems with the batch run.
Example 5: Comparing Two Time Ranges
An engineer wants to compare the performance of a Boiler unit over two time ranges. He
needs to determine whether a boiler's performance has degraded over time or whether there
are specific problems with the equipment. To do this, he creates an XYPlot that compares the
temperature tag data from two different time ranges.
1. Enter the tag twice and assign one instance as the X tag.
2. Enter separate time ranges for each tag.
3. Set the match mechanism to be recorded or interpolated so that values are paired by their
position in the list.
If the pairs fall close to a linear regression line, you can assume the boiler's performance is at
least steady. If some pairs are far from the line, it may indicate that the equipment has a
specific problem.

Additional Dynamic Symbols


Values

A Value is the reading obtained for a data stream at the end time of a display. It is shown as a
number or a digital state string. The tag name and time stamp may also be shown. The time
stamp is the time stamp from the FactoryTalk Historian System that matches the event value
shown.
Add a Dynamic Value
1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click the Value button

-orClick Draw > Value.


The mouse pointer changes to the Value pointer.
3. Click in the display where you want the value to be placed.
When you release the mouse button, the Define Value dialog box is displayed.

108

Additional Dynamic Symbols

4. In the Server drop-down list, select the Historian Server to use. If a tag name is manually
entered in the Tag box, it is expected to be on the selected server. If both server and tag
name are entered in the Tag box, this field is updated with the entered server name. This
field has no effect for non-FactoryTalk Historian data.
5. In the Tag box, type the name of the tag you want to display in the value box.
-orClick the Tag Search button to locate a tag, or
Click the Tag Search arrow to see more search options:

Tag Search (page 153)


Historian Calculation (page 163) (data set)
ODBC (page 167) (data set)
AF2 (page 177) - launches the Select AF Attribute dialog box, from which you can
search an AF database for elements and attributes.
Element Relative - launches the Element Search dialog box from which you can
search an AF database for elements.

Note: The Sample area shows how the value will look.

6. In the Format drop-down list, select a number format:

DatabaseDatabase format uses the displaydigits Historian Point attribute to


determine how many decimal places to show. If the length of the number exceeds the
displaydigits value, scientific notation is used. FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook trims trailing zeroes that follow a decimal point. The Database format
option is intended for use with Historian Tags only.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

109

Visualize Data with Symbols

GeneralShows all significant digits for a number except trailing zeros. If the
absolute value of the value is greater than 1e+7 or less than 1e-5, the format will
switch to use scientific notation.
ScientificMost useful with very large numbers. The scientific format used for
trends displays in the format: 0.00E+00.
Custom (#,##0.00, 0%)Allows you to enter your own number format. See the
Table of Format Values for examples.

7. In the Tag drop-down list, select the location of the tag name in the value box (None,
Left, Right, Top, or Bottom).
8. In the Time stamp drop-down list, select the location of the time stamp in the value box
(None, Left, Right, Top, or Bottom).
9. Click OK to add the value to the display.
Note: FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook allows you to create custom placeholders for a
symbol based on a summary Data Set or a Historian Tag placeholder in an ODBC
data set. Placeholders are not allowed for expression Data Sets. The Custom
Placeholders button in symbol definition dialog boxes allows you to specify
different Historian Tags for a Historian Summary Data Set or ODBC data set with
a Historian Tag placeholder. The change applies only to the configured symbol.
See Add or Edit Placeholders (page 170) for details.

Button

You can add a button to your


drawing that:

For example:

Opens an independent display (.pdi)

Create a drawing that shows the first part of a general


process and add a button that opens a more detailed
process in a separate display.

Opens a ProcessBook (.piw)

Create a link to a related display in a different


ProcessBook.

Executes an operating system


command

Create a drawing and add a button that opens a


FactoryTalk Historian DataLink spreadsheet to show a
report.
Create a drawing and add a button that opens an
independent FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Display
(.pdi file) on a web site.
Note: You need to enter the URL (Uniform Resource
Locator) address that points to the location of the
specific .pdi file on a web server.

Executes a VBA script

110

Create a VBA script called AddTrend that inserts a trend


on a display. Add a button to the display and configure it
to use the AddTrend script (macro) as its Action.

Additional Dynamic Symbols

Add a Button
1. In Build mode, open a display.
On the Drawing toolbar, click the Button button

, or

Click Draw > Button.


The mouse pointer changes to the Button pointer.
2. Click in the display where you want to add the button and drag the pointer to form a
rectangle into which the button will be placed. When you release the mouse button, the
Define Button dialog box appears.
3. In the Text box, type the name of the button.
Note: The name should be no more than one or two words, and should describe the
action the button performs when clicked.

4. Click the Browse button, or


Click the Browse arrow to see more options.
The Open dialog box appears.
5. Browse and locate the item that you want to be the button action and then click the Open
button.
Note: If you know the file or macro name, then you can type this directly in the
Action box.

The name of the selected item is displayed in the Action box.


6. Click the Browse button to the right of the Working folder box.
Note: The Working folder box allows you to specify the working folder for operating
system commands. It is ignored if the Action refers to a document type
supported by ProcessBook. If you know the name of the working folder for this
application, then you can type this directly in the Working folder box.

The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.


7. Browse and locate the folder that you want to specify for the operating system command,
and then click OK.
8. Leave the appropriate Options check box selected if you want to:

Open a linked display in a new window. This option is selected by default.


Use the relative path before the absolute path.

Note: By default, ProcessBook attempts to open a linked display from its relative
path first. If the relative path fails, then the absolute path is attempted.
Clearing this box reverses the order in which the paths are resolved. For new
displays, this option is checked by default.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

111

Visualize Data with Symbols

Ignore the default shell command for recognized file types (for example, SVG).

Note: If the file type is supported by ProcessBook (either natively or through an addin), then it is opened directly. For example, an .svg file is opened using the
.svg File Converter in ProcessBook, even if you have Adobe SVG Viewer
installed. Clearing this check box disables this behavior, so the default shell
command is always used to open a file.

9. Click OK. The button is added to your display.

Bars

A Bar shows the current value of a tag as compared to a specified range of values.
For example, a bar may be used to create the effect of a vessel filling and emptying, as the
value changes.
The range of values can be the maximum and minimum values specified in the point
attributes, or, a bar can be designed to show a specific range of values.
For example, if a tags specified value is between 0 and 100 but it typically falls between 0
and 30, a bar can designed to show that range. However, if the value is outside the range of
the bar, the bar will appear the same as a value right at one of the limits of the bar.
The start of the bar may be within the limits of the bar. This lets you display deviations from
a standard or target value. Bad values are shown with hash marks across the entire bar.
Add a Dynamic Bar
Creating a bar for a value allows you to see how the current value compares to the possible
range of values. Since bars are dynamic, they are updated as the information changes from
the Historian Server.
Bars may also be used to display the result of a data set query. String and timestamp data is
not supported on Bar symbols.
You can draw a bar using the current line style, line color, and fill attributes.
1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click the Bar button

, or

Click Draw > Bar.


The mouse pointer changes to the Bar pointer.
3. Click in the display where you want to add the bar and drag the pointer to form a
rectangle into which the bar will be placed.
When you release the mouse button, the Define Bar dialog box appears.

112

Additional Dynamic Symbols

4. In the Server drop-down list, select the server to use for manually entered tags. If the
server and tag name are both entered in the Tag box, this field is updated to show the new
server name. This field is ignored for non-FactoryTalk Historian data.
5. In the Tag box, type the name of the tag you want to display on the bar, or
Click the Tag Search button to locate a tag, or
Click the Tag Search arrow to see more search options:

Tag Search (page 153)


Historian Calculation (page 163) (data set)
ODBC (page 167) (data set)
AF2 (page 177) - launches the Select AF Attribute dialog box, from which you can
search an AF database for elements and attributes.
Element Relative - launches the Element Search dialog box from which you can
search an AF database for elements.

6. From the Upper and Lower drop-down lists, select the maximum and minimum values
you want to use for the bar. Enter a constant, or choose Tag Zero() or
TagZero()+TagSpan() for either or both values.
Note: If you choose a maximum value that is too small, the bar will be fully colored
but there will be no warning that it has exceeded the maximum.

7. From the Start drop-down list, select the point on the bar from which you want to start
drawing the bar. Enter a constant, or select TagZero()+TagSpan() or Tag Zero().

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

113

Visualize Data with Symbols

8. Under Orientation, select one of the options to display the bar either vertically or
horizontally.
The Upper and Lower drop-down lists are renamed Right and Left when you select
Horizontal orientation.
Note: The Sample area shows how the bar will look.

9. Under Scales, select Show Scales to show data values and scale tick marks on the bar
symbol.
When you select Scales, the Scales Inside and Number Formats are enabled. See Bar
Scales (page 114) for information on working with scales.
10. Click OK to add the bar to the display.
Note: FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook allows you to create custom placeholders for a
symbol based on a summary Data Set or a Historian Tag placeholder in an ODBC
data set. Placeholders are not allowed for expression Data Sets. The Custom
Placeholders button in symbol definition dialog boxes allows you to specify
different Historian Tags for a Historian Summary Data Set or ODBC data set with
a Historian Tag placeholder. The change applies only to the configured symbol.
See Add or Edit Placeholders (page 170) for details.

Bar Scales
The options under Scales control how the bar symbol shows scales.
Defaults
The default is to show scales inside the bar symbol in General number format for symbol
bars created with FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.3.2.229 or later. For earlier versions
of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, Show Scales is not selected, and scales do not appear
on the symbol bar.
The scale values for the bar symbol are the Upper and Lower or Right and Left values in the
Define Bar dialog box for both tags and datasets, including AF.
The default font is the font of the display.
Digital tags show the value of the digital state rather than the numeric value of the state.
Compatibility
Bars created in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.3.2.229 are backward compatible with
previous versions of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.
When a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.3.2.229 file is opened in a previous version,
bar symbols appear as they did in the previous version. If the display is saved and reopened in
a newer version, the scale settings are retained.
A display created in version 3.2 or earlier of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook defaults to
ShowScales not selected.
114

Additional Dynamic Symbols

Tick Marks
For vertical bars, the tick marks and values are shown on the left hand side of the symbol. For
horizontal bars, the tick marks and values are shown on the bottom of the symbol. You can
draw the scales inside or outside the bar symbol.

Vertical Bar with scales (outside and inside)

Horizontal Bar with scales (outside and inside)

The lengths of major and minor tick marks is a percentage of the height or width of the bar,
depending on the bar orientation, as described in the following table.
Horizontal

Vertical

Minor Tick

4% of Height

4% of Width

Major Tick

8% of Height

8% of Width

For vertical bars, the tick marks and values are automatically turned off if the height of the
bar becomes less than two times the height of the text used to write the scale values, or if the
width is less than the width of the longest text used to write the scale value plus a small
offset.
For horizontal bars, the tick marks and values are automatically turned off if the width of the
bar becomes less than two times the width of the longest text used to write the scale value, or
if the height is less than the height of the text used to write the scale values plus a small
offset.
For both bar orientations, given the range of scale values, the scale increment values are
rounded numbers, as close to integers as possible.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

115

Visualize Data with Symbols

The maximum number of major tick marks is nine; eleven counting the maximum and
minimum values. The number of tick marks shown is a function of the size of the font and the
size of the bar symbol. The number of major tick marks decreases as the size of the bar is
decreases.
The minor tick marks are shown at the half way point between major tick marks.
There are major tick marks for each digital state, if the string value for the digital states fits in
the width of the bar. There are no minor tick marks for digital tags.
Format Appearance
To change the appearance of the bar symbol, right-click the bar.

Click Format Font to change the font for the bar symbol.

Click Format Color to change the color of the bar symbol.


The color for the tick marks and values is the same as the bars line color.

Click Format Line Style to change the style of line for the bar symbol.

Multi-State Symbols

Some symbols support a multi-state configuration, which allows their colors to be altered
based on a dynamic data value. Colors are assigned to ranges of values to create conditional
formatting states. Any symbol except a trend, XY Plot, graphic, button, or OLE object can
have a Multi-State configuration. String and timestamp data cannot be used to configure
multi-state behavior.
You determine the number of value ranges, the maximum for each range, and the colors
assigned to each range. As the value of the tag changes, the Multi-State symbol changes color
to reflect the current value state. You can make a symbol seem to disappear by setting a state
color to the background color or to a color of none. For alarms or other purposes, you can set
a state color to blink.
For example, you may have a symbol showing two states. State 1 has a value range from 0 to
50 and a color of blue assigned to it. State 2 may have a range from 50 to 100 and have red
assigned to it. When the reading is 50 or below, the symbol appears blue. Above 50, the
symbol appears red. A color and sometimes a blinking attribute are assigned for data in bad
status (for example, the interface becomes disconnected). For digital point types, a different
color may be assigned to each digital state.
The following symbols support multi-state formatting:

116

Value

Bar

Rectangle

Ellipse

Multi-State Symbols

Line (or Connector)

Text

Polygon

Polyline

Arc

Symbol Library

Create Dynamic Multi-State Symbols


You can create a Multi-State symbol after you have drawn a symbol or copied one from the
Symbol Library dialog box.
1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. Click the symbol that you want to use for creating a Multi-State symbol.
On the Formatting toolbar, click the Multi-State Symbol button

, or

Click Edit > Multi-State.


3. The Multi-State Symbol dialog box appears.

4. In the Server drop-down list, select the server to use for entered tags. If a server and tag
are both entered in the Tag box, this field is updated with the new server name. This box
does not apply to non-FactoryTalk Historian data.
5. In the Tag box, type the name of the tag you want to assign, or
Click the Tag Search button to locate a tag, or
Click the Tag Search arrow to see more search options:

Tag Search (page 153)

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

117

Visualize Data with Symbols

Historian Calculation (page 163) (data set)


ODBC (page 167) (data set)
AF2 (page 177) - launches the Select AF Attribute dialog box, from which you can
search an AF database for elements and attributes.
Element Relative - launches the Element Search dialog box from which you can
search an AF database for elements.

6. In the Number of States box, select the number of states to use. If the number of states is
not entered, the number defaults to 2. (For digital tags, the number of states is
automatically set to the number of defined states for that tag.)
7. From the Color for Bad Data drop-down color palette, select a color that will be used
when the information is in bad status. You may also select the Blink check box to call
attention to the symbol when data is bad (optional).
8. In the State box, select 1.
9. In the Values box, type in a new maximum value for the state.
Note: The Values boxes display a range of values for each state. The total range of
the tag is automatically divided by the number of states. For digital tags, the
state name is displayed in these boxes. For other tag types, an estimate is
made based on the span of values for the tag.

10. From the Color drop-down color palette, select a color that will be used for the state. You
may also select the Blink check box (optional).
11. Repeat Steps 9 and 10 for each state in the symbol. Your choices and the relative range of
values are displayed on the bar at the bottom of the dialog box.
12. Click OK.
Note: You can remove a Multi-State symbol definition by clicking the Convert to Static
button, which breaks the link between the symbol and the multi-state
configuration.
Note: FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook allows you to create custom
placeholders for a symbol based on a summary Data Set or a Historian Tag
placeholder in an ODBC data set. Placeholders are not allowed for expression
Data Sets. The Custom Placeholders button in symbol definition dialog boxes
allows you to specify different Historian Tags for a Historian Summary Data Set or
ODBC data set with a Historian Tag placeholder. The change applies only to the
configured symbol. See Add or Edit Placeholders (page 170) for details.

Static Symbols
Text Symbol

118

Static Symbols

The text symbol allows you to put one line of text on a display. Multiple lines of text are not
supported. When this symbol is first added to the display, a text box with a blinking text
cursor is displayed.
You can add or edit text by double-clicking the Text symbol while in Build mode, which
provides the text cursor. Unlike most other ProcessBook symbols, this symbol is not sized by
dragging an area on the display. Instead, the symbol is sized to accommodate the text within.
When text is added, the symbol grows in size and when text is removed the symbol size
shrinks. The size of the font used also affects the size of the symbol.
You can format the text symbol for font and color. Text symbols have all the functionality of
other static symbols except rotating and flipping.
Add Text to a Display
Use the Text tool to add text to a display.
1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click the Text button

, or

Click Draw > Text.


The mouse pointer changes to a text pointer.
3. Click in the display where you want to add the text.
4. Type the text in the text block. (You can only type the text on one line. It will not wrap.)
Note: Text block refers to the text area associated with a shape that appears when
you click the shape with the text tool or select it with the pointer tool.

5. When you finish typing, press ESC or click outside the text block.
Edit a Text Box
1. In Build mode, open a display and double-click the text block you want to edit.
2. Click where you want to add or edit text.
3. Type to add text or edit the text.
4. When you finish typing, press ESC or click outside the text block.
Move a Text Block
1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. Click the text block you want to move, drag it to the new location, and then release the
mouse button.

Line Symbol

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

119

Visualize Data with Symbols

Lines within a drawing can be diagonal, horizontal, or vertical. Attributes you can change
include line color and whether a line is dotted or dashed, thick or thin, and with or without
arrowheads.
Draw a Line
1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click the Line button

, or

Click Draw > Line.


3. The mouse pointer changes to the line pointer.
4. Point to where you want to start the line.
5. Drag to draw the line. Press the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the line to a
horizontal or vertical line.

Rectangle, Square, Arc, Ellipse, and Circle Symbol

Using the drawing tools, you can create these simple shapes:

Rectangle, Square

Arc

Ellipse, Circle

Draw a Rectangle, Square, Arc, Ellipse, or Circle


1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click the Rectangle

, Arc

,or Ellipse button

, or

Click the appropriate tool.


The mouse pointer changes to a tool pointer. The appearance of the pointer indicates the
type of tool you have chosen.
3. Click the display to place the upper left corner of the shape, and drag down and to the
right to create a shape of the desired size.
Press SHIFT while drawing to constrain the object to a square, circle, or circular arc.
4. Release the mouse button to complete a Rectangle, Square, Ellipse, or Circle.
-or5. If you used the arc tool, one quarter of the shape is drawn. Click on it and resize it to the
desired shape. Click and drag the end of the arc to change the angle.
120

Static Symbols

Press SHIFT to change the angle in 15-degree increments. When the arc is first drawn,
the handle for reshaping the angle is just inside the resize handle.

Example of an arc

Polygon Symbol

The Polygon tool draws irregular shapes. When you select the polygon tool the mouse pointer
changes to a polygon pointer. Polygons are drawn using the current color and line style
attributes.
Draw a Polygon
1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click the Polygon button

, or

Choose Draw > Polygon.


The mouse pointer changes to the Polygon pointer.
3. Click inside the display where you want to start drawing the first point of the polygon
(point "a" in the example below).
4. Drag to create the first side (point "a" to point "b" in the example below).
5. Release the mouse button to position the second point of the polygon (point "b" in the
example below).
6. Click at each of the remaining points of the polygon (points "c" through "g" in example
below). Lines are drawn between the clicks.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

121

Visualize Data with Symbols

7. To close and fill the polygon, double-click to place the last point in the polygon (point
"g" in the example below). This action draws a line from the last point to the first point
(point "g" to point "a" in the example below).

Example of a Polygon

Polyline Symbol

A Polyline is a set of line segments that you can draw using the Polyline tool. It uses the
current line style attributes.
Once you add a Polyline symbol, you may edit it in the same manner as the existing Polygon
symbol. You can move or resize the entire symbol, as well as move the individual endpoints
to create any desired arrangement.
Draw a Polyline
1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click the Polyline button

The mouse pointer changes to the Polyline pointer.


3. Click inside the display where you want the starting point of the first line segment.
4. Drag to the location of the second point to make the first line.
Each time you click the mouse button again, a new line is drawn from the location of the
previously plotted point to the current location of the mouse pointer.
5. To finish the Polyline drawing, double-click. Press ESC to cancel the line altogether.
Note: Press the Shift key while you draw to create Right Angle Polylines.
Similarly, pressing Shift during editing manipulates a point orthogonally in relation to the
next endpoint.

122

Static Symbols

Graphic Symbol

In FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook you can:

Include a graphic file from another application, such as Microsoft Visio or CorelDRAW.

Use a drawing or picture as the background for your display, then add symbols to it. This
can reduce the amount of time you take to create a drawing.

Rotate or flip a picture.

Add an illustration to a display, and store it within the display or link it to the original
graphic file. (Linking means that if the original graphic is edited or moved, it affects the
appearance of the display as well.)

Load an image in one file format and later save it in a different format.

Note: A drawing is display resolution dependent, which means it may look different from
one monitor to another. Test the drawing on each monitor to see how it will look.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook supports the following image formats. Note that
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook draws using raster graphics, so vector graphic formats
may not appear exactly as expected.
BMP

Windows Bitmap file; standard, non-compressed bit-mapped graphic

CUR

A file that contains an image that defines the shape of a cursor on the screen.

EMF

Enhanced Metafile Format; 32-bit Microsoft Windows Metafile vector format that also
supports raster images.

ICO

A file that contains a graphic to be used as an icon.

JPEG

Joint Photographic Experts Group - Refers both to the standard for storing compressed
images and a graphic stored in that format. Note that this format is prone to lose
resolution when it is repeatedly saved.

PNG

Portable Network Graphics - graphic image format that utilizes lossless compression.

TIFF, TIF

Tag Image File Format graphic image.

WMF

The Windows Metafile Format - the original 16-bit native vector file format for the
Microsoft Windows operating environment.

Add a Graphic
1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click the Graphic button

, or

Click Draw > Graphic.


The mouse pointer changes to a graphic pointer.
3. Click in the display where you want to add the image and drag the pointer to form a
rectangle into which the graphic will be placed.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

123

Visualize Data with Symbols

When you release the mouse button, the Define Graphic dialog box is displayed.

4. Click the Browse button to locate the graphic drawing.


-orIn the File Name box, type the path and file name of the graphic you want to insert.
5. Under Image Location, select:

Embed if you want to update the graphic within the display file.
Link if you want to store the graphic separately from the display file.

6. Under Format, select the appropriate option.


Note: Stretching the image to fit the bounding rectangle may distort the appearance
of the graphic.

7. Click OK.
8. A copy of the graphic is added to the display.

Symbol Library

A large selection of images is available in the Symbol Library. Many of these images have
characteristics such as color, fill type, orientation, or background, which you can modify.
On the installation DVD, Rockwell Automation provides several other commonly used
images in the ProcessBook file SYMLIBRY.PIW. You can cut and paste these images into a
display. You can also add frequently used drawing components (for example, company
logos) to this PIW file for later reuse. This file is usually installed here:
C:\Program
Files\ProcessBook\ProgramFiles\pipc\Procbook\SYMLIBRY.PIW

124

Static Symbols

Add an Image from the Symbol Library


1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click the Symbol Library button

-orOn the Draw menu, click Symbol Library. The mouse pointer changes to the Symbol
Library pointer.
3. Click in the display where you want to add the image and drag the pointer to form a
rectangle into which to place it.
When you release the mouse button, the Symbol Library dialog box appears.
4. Under Categories, click the type of image you want to use, such as Boilers, Controllers,
Valves, etc.

5. Click Options (page 125) to modify the image.


6. Click OK to add the image to your display.
Configure Symbol Library Options
1. In the Symbol Library (page 125) dialog box, a selection of images is displayed in the
right-hand side of the dialog box, click the appropriate symbol, and then click the
Options button.
-orRight-click the image and click Symbol Options. The Symbol Options dialog box
appears.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

125

Visualize Data with Symbols

Configure the following options:

Fill ModeControls the way the image is drawn. Options include Original, Shaded,
Solid or Hollow.
Fill ColorClick the color box to change the fill color.
FlipSelect Horizontal, Vertical, or Both to change the orientation of the image.
The default setting is None. This setting returns the image to its original position.
RotationSelect 90, 180, or 270 to turn the image by 90 degree increments. The
default setting is 0. This setting returns the image to its original position.
TransparentCheck this box if you want a transparent background.
Background ColorIf the Transparent check box is not selected, you can click the
color box to change the background color.

Note: Change the image fill and background color directly on a display by using the
Fill Color
and Background Color
Formatting toolbar.

buttons on the Symbol

2. Click the Defaults button if you want to revert to the default settings.
3. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the Symbol Library (page 125) dialog box.
Symbol Properties
If you right-click an image in the Symbol Library, the focus box at the upper left reflects that
image. A small dialog box appears; you can choose either Symbol Options or Properties.
If you choose Properties, you see a Symbol Properties dialog box, which displays the
Symbol description, Data size, Type, and Handle information. This information could be used
in VBA automation of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.

126

Chapter 6

Work with Symbols


Details and Annotations
The Details docking window is available to show data from dynamic symbols. The window
is only available in Run mode and initially appears along the right side of your ProcessBook
window; however, you can click and drag it anywhere inside the FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook application.
The PI Annotations editor is located at the bottom of the Details window.

Details Window
To view data in the Details window, click a symbol in your display. Moving a plot cursor
changes the rows highlighted to show the range of data around the cursor time.
By default, the window remains open when a different display symbol is selected. The
Details window is hidden when you switch to Build mode. You cannot open the Details
window while in Build mode.
The Details window contains the following components:

Data ItemThis field allows you to choose a data item, including datasets and Historian
tags in the selected symbol (by default, the first trace or main data source for the selected
symbol is shown). The Show All entry shows data for all the data sources in the selected
symbol.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

127

Work with Symbols

Note: The Show All option only displays the first 3,500 values. This value can be
increased by adding the registry key HKCU\Software\PISystem\PI ProcessBook\DetailsAddin\MaxPoints (type DWORD) and setting it to
the maximum number of points desired.

OptionThis field allows you to toggle among three different types of information about
your data source.

Datashows recorded values for a selected symbol's time range. By default the table is
sorted on the timestamp column in descending order.
Questionable (Q): The event value is unreliable or the circumstances under which it
was recorded are suspect.
Annotated (A): An annotation has been made to the event to include further
information or commentary. You can add annotations (page 129) to Historian tags
using FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, if you have permission to write to that tag
on the Historian Server.
Substituted (S): The event value has been changed from the original archived value.

Statisticsshows a table of available summary values available, for example, Average,


Minimum, and Maximum. Selecting this option disables the PI Annotation
Maintenance controls. Available statistics vary for each symbol type.

Point Attributesshows an alphabetized list of Historian point attribute values (page


156). This option is only available for Historian tags. Selecting this option disables the
Historian Annotation Maintenance controls.

Each view option provides the following controls:


<Symbol Name>The name of the symbol selected on the display is shown above the data
table.
Refresh
Refresh data in all tables. Data shown does not automatically change after a
symbol is first selected. You must use refresh to view any updates in the Details window.
Enlarge/Shrink Font
number of visible rows.

Makes the text size bigger or smaller. This may reduce the

Copy to Clipboard
Allows you to copy the data table to your clipboard. You can then
paste this data into another location such as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
Note: Use the pin icon
to lock the docking window to your screen. Click the pin icon
again to unpin the window and minimize it along the border of your FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook window. When a docking window is unpinned, a button
appears along the side of the screen. Hover over it to re-expand the window.

Open Details Window


Click View > Details to display the Details window (page 127). Alternatively, you can select
the Show Details and Annotations command from the Context Display Menu.

128

Details and Annotations

The Details window is only available in Run mode.

Historian Annotations Maintenance


Annotations allow you to associate related information (such as text comments and other
binary data) with any archive value. The PI Annotation Maintenance group at the bottom of
the Details window (page 127) allows you to easily annotate values on your dynamic
symbols.

Annotations can be added, edited or viewed, provided that:

The selected data item points to a Historian Tag

The target Historian Server can read and write annotations

You have permission to write annotations on the target Historian Server

A row representing an event is selected in the Data table

If the target Historian Server (or collective) is unavailable or cannot accept edits from the
current user, the control is disabled. If the Historian Server becomes unavailable while you
are entering an annotation and you then click the Save button, you will receive an error.
Note: If you select Show All from the Data Source drop-down box on the Details (page
127) window, the Value and Value Type fields in the PI Annotation Maintenance
group are disabled.

Add Annotations
1. Open the Details (page 127) window
2. In Run mode, select a dynamic symbol on your display.
3. Select the event of interest in the Data table.
4. Click inside the Value text box and enter the information you wish displayed in your
annotation.
5. Select a value from the Value Type drop-down box.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

129

Work with Symbols

6. Click the Save button


at the top of the PI Annotations Maintenance group. An
annotation icon
appears on the dynamic symbol if it is showing the annotated event.
Hover over this icon to read your annotation. A record of the annotation also appears on
the Details window when the Data option is selected.
Note: You need to be running a Historian Server 2.0 or later for annotations to work
correctly. Otherwise, it is possible that an annotated event will not only be marked
as annotated, but will also be marked as substituted.

Data Favorites
The Data Favorites add-in provides a way to configure symbols by dragging a Historian tag
name (or other data item) from a list onto the symbol.
The add-in can be unloaded or set not to load at startup by changing the options in the Add-in
Manager (page 8) dialog box. When the Data Favorites add-in is first loaded, its window
appears in the upper left corner of the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook application
window. The window is only accessible in Build mode. If the window is closed, in Build
mode, click View > Data Favorites.
There are two panels within the Data Favorites window:

Search (page 130)

Favorites (page 131)

Each panel can be collapsed if it is not needed.

Select a Default Symbol


The Default Symbol button
controls which symbol is created when data items are
dropped on an empty area of the display. To set the default symbol, click the Default Symbol
button and select an option from the drop-down list.
Available symbols:

Bar (page 112)

Trend (page 71)

Value (page 108)

XYPlot (page 90)

Note: If the selected symbol type does not support the data type of the dropped data
item, a value symbol is drawn instead.

Search for Data Favorites

130

Data Favorites

Use the Search panel to search for Historian tags and other data items.
To search for data items, use the Search Mask text box or click the Tag Search button
to launch the Tag Search dialog box. Tags selected using the Tag Search dialog box
automatically populate the Data Favorites Search list.
The Search Mask field searches for tags matching the entered string on your default Historian
Server.
To save a data item to your Favorites, either drag and drop it into your Favorites list, or right
click the data item in the Search list and click Add to Favorites.
Note: Use the pin icon
to lock the docking window to your screen. Click the pin icon
again to unpin the window and minimize it along the border of your FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook window. When a docking window is unpinned, a button
appears along the side of the screen. Hover over it to re-expand the window.

Favorites Panel

The Favorites panel provides controls for manipulating the list of data favorites (page 130).
Note: The Favorites list is saved per user, so when a different user opens FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook on the same machine, their list may be different.

Use Favorites
1. In Build mode, click View > Data Favorites to launch the Data Favorites docking
window.
2. Select a default symbol for Data Favorites. Any favorites dragged onto a display take the
form of this symbol.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

131

Work with Symbols

3. In the Favorites panel, drag and drop any listed favorite to an existing trend or XYPlot
symbol, or to a blank area of a display. The data item is permanently added once the
display is saved.
Note: If the dropped selection contains multiple data items (for example, multiple
tags) and the Bar or Value symbol is selected, a symbol is created for each
one, slightly offset from each other, in cascading layout.

Import or Export Data Favorites


To import data favorites:
1. Right-click in the Datasource list in the Favorites panel, and click Import Favorites.
2. Select a text file to import.
To export data favorites:
1. Right-click in the Datasource list in the Favorites panel, and click Export Favorites. The
Save as dialog box appears.
2. Name the export file to save.
Drag Data Between FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook and Other Applications
The Data Favorites (page 130) add-in supports dragging a list of tag names in the following
formats:

One row of tags separated by either a semi-colon or tab delimiter

Multiple rows (row delimited by a new line) of at least two columns which are delimited
by either a tab or a semi-colon. Only one delimiter is used, and while there can be more
than two columns in the dragged rows, only the first two columns are used. The first
column must be the tag name, the second column may be an optional tag descriptor.

Drags can come from any application that supports the text clipboard format, for example,
Microsoft Word or Excel.

Select and Move a Symbol


Before you can apply commands to display objects you must select them. You can select
single or multiple items on a display.
1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. Click a symbol in your display. Small squares appear around the bounding rectangle of
the symbol.
3. If you want to move the symbol, drag the symbol to the desired location within your
display.
Press the Tab key to toggle among different symbols in your display once a symbol is
selected. When you press the Tab key you deselect the current object and select the next
132

Select Multiple Symbols

object in the tabbing order. The tabbing order follows the stacking order (page 134) on the
display (by default, the order in which objects were added to the display).
To cancel a selection on any one object press SHIFT while clicking the object to deselect. To
cancel selection of all objects on a display, click on the display background (in a spot where
there are no symbols).
Note: ActiveX controls on the display do not react to tab order like other ProcessBook
symbols because they are treated as separate windows within the display.

Select Multiple Symbols


You can perform many of the editing and organizing functions on more than one symbol at a
time. For example, once selected, you can move multiple symbols to a new location, edit the
color of lines and fill for multiple symbols, or even flip and rotate multiple symbols.
1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. Do one of the following:

To select all of the symbols in a drawing area, click Edit > Select All.
To select individual symbols, press SHIFT while clicking each symbol. Selection
handles display around each selected item.
To select several symbols at the same time, click near a symbol, and then drag to
create a rectangle that includes all the symbols you want to select.
To select symbols that are stacked on top of each other, click the top symbol.
Selection handles appear. Continue clicking the top symbol to select symbols located
under the top symbol.

3. Click the symbols you want to change or move. The selected symbols display handles.

Rotate a Symbol
You can rotate a drawing symbol in 15 or 1 increments. You cannot rotate text, graphics, or
OLE objects. Symbol Library images can only be rotated in 90 increments.
1. Select the symbol you want to rotate.
2. Click Arrange > Rotate. A rotation object appears in the center of the symbol.
3. Click a selection handle and drag in the direction that you want to rotate the symbol. The
symbol is rotated in 1 increments.
-orPress SHIFT while dragging to rotate in 15 increments.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

133

Work with Symbols

Flip a Symbol
You can create a mirror image of a symbol by flipping it. You cannot flip text, graphics, or
OLE objects.
1. Select the symbol you want to flip.
2. Click Arrange > Flip > Horizontal to flip the symbol from right to left or Vertical to
flip the symbol from top to bottom.

Delete a Symbol
When you want to delete a drawing symbol or group of symbols:
1. Select a symbol or multiple symbols that you want to delete.
2. Press DELETE,
-orClick Edit > Clear.

Stacking Order
Each symbol you add to a drawing occupies its own space in the drawing. The layers, and
therefore the symbols, are stacked on top of each other. By default, the first symbol you draw
is at the bottom of the stacking order and the last symbol you draw is at the top of the
stacking order.
Using the stacking commands, you can move a symbol forward or backward within the stack.
Depending on the number of objects between top and bottom, you may need to repeat a
stacking command several times to move the symbol to the desired location within the stack.

Move a Symbol Forward or Backward in the Stack


1. Select the symbol you want to order.

134

Align Multiple Symbols

2. On the Arrange menu, choose the direction you want to move the symbol:

Click Forward to move it up one level (on top of something else).


Click Backward to move it down one level (below something else).
Click Bring to Front to move it to the top of the stack (on top of everything).
Click Send to Back to move it to the bottom of the stack (below everything).

Align Multiple Symbols


You can align drawing symbols (page 53) with each other. Use this feature to align symbols
along their tops, bottoms, sides, or centers (either vertically or horizontally). The first symbol
you select is the symbol to which others are aligned.
When two or more value symbols are aligned, the text justification for each matches the
alignment rule: left, center, or right.
1. Select the symbols you want to align.
2. Click Arrange > Align.
The Align submenu is displayed.

3. Click the alignment options you want. All the selected symbols are aligned to the symbol
you first selected, along the axis you specify.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

135

Work with Symbols

Examples of Alignment Options

Group, Ungroup, or Regroup symbols


When creating or manipulating complex shapes, it is sometimes easier to combine individual
symbols into one. You can group two or more symbols together, or you can group several
groups. Once grouped, any commands that you apply affect the composite symbol as if it
were a single symbol.
If you want a group of symbols to remain together, but you need to continue modifying the
components separately, you can attach the symbols (page 140) instead of grouping them.
Select the symbols you want to group and from the Arrange menu choose one of the
following:

GroupThe symbols combine into one composite symbol with selection


handles around the entire group.
UngroupThe group is disassembled into its component symbols.
RegroupYou do not need to re-select all the components to regroup a
previously grouped set of symbols. This command is only enabled when it applies.

Connectors
Connect Symbols

Connect two symbols to each other using the connector symbol. A connector remains
attached to other symbols regardless of how you move them. A connector is intended for
modeling and automation purposes.
Connection points on each symbol define where a connection occurs. You can add, delete, or
move connection points on a symbol.

136

Connectors

Connectors try to avoid objects as they are being connected between two symbols. As
connectors are drawn, they are orthogonal to the display, meaning that they go horizontally or
vertically. There are no diagonal connectors.
Each end of a connector attaches to a connection point on another symbol. If you have not
already created a connection point on a symbol, a connection point is built automatically as
you draw the connector across a bounding line of the symbol.
To connect two existing symbols on a display:
1. Click the Connector button

-orClick Draw > Connector.


2. Click the first symbol, called the source, and drag the mouse into the second symbol,
called the destination. The connector arrow has a flow direction from the source to the
destination. Connection points appear on both symbols.
We recommend that you not move connectors by dragging and dropping them. Instead,
use the Connectors dialog box to rearrange connectors.
Note: You can use the Undo and Redo commands with connectors.

Connection Points
Connection points on each symbol define where a connector may connect. Connection points
are visible in Build mode only and appear on symbols as small x marks. When you select one
with your cursor, it changes to an x within a bounding circle.
A connection point is created automatically when a connector is dragged into a symbol. This
point is created at the midpoint of the nearest edge of the bounding rectangle of the symbol.
The end of the connector is moved to the connection point. You may add connection points
and move them to specific locations.
A connection point can be used for either the start of the flow or the end of a flow. The same
connection point can be used for both. A flow can be bi-directional.
If a second connector is dragged over a symbol, it either moves to the existing connection
point or creates a new one.
For irregular figures, connection points are placed near the midpoint of the side of the
bounding rectangle of the figure, as shown in the illustration below, rather than inside the
figure itself. You can adjust the position of the connection point to touch the actual figure.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

137

Work with Symbols

Connector with Connection Point on the Bounding Rectangle

Note: If a symbol is placed in front of another, the connection points on the hidden
symbol cannot be selected. You can solve this problem by placing the two
symbols on different layers of the display.

Add Connection Points


To add a connection point:
1. In Build mode, select the symbol.
2. Click Edit > Connection Points > Add. A point appears at the upper left of the symbol.
3. If you wish, drag the new connection point to a different location.
Note: After you select one connection point, you can press C on the keyboard to cycle
through any additional connection points on that symbol.

Disconnect a Connection Point


To disconnect a connection point from a connector:

1. In Build mode, click the connector connected to the connection point you want to
disconnect.
2. Move your pointer over the connection point you want to disconnect. The point turns into
a +.
3. Click and drag the + sign to disconnect the connection point.
Delete Connection Points
To delete a connection point from a symbol:
1. Select the connection point.
2. Click Edit > Connection Points > Delete.
Move Connection Points
Connection points may be moved to a new position within a symbol. To do this, click on a
connection point in Build mode and drag it.
For very fine adjustments, you can move connection points on a symbol.
1. In Build mode, click on a connection point.
2. Click Edit > Connection Points > Move. The Connection Point Placement dialog box
appears, where you can edit the width and height ratios in comparison to the X and Y
axes of the symbol.

138

Connectors

Determine the Identifying Number of a Connection Point


In Build mode, if you place your mouse over a connection point, a ToolTip shows the
connection point number. The following illustration refers to connection point 2 on Rectangle
1. Connection point numbers are used on the Connectors Dialog box Flow tab (page 141).

Connection Point Numbering

In other words, connection points have identifying names that are derived from the symbol
name. For example, for a rectangle named Rectangle2, two connection points would be
named <Rectangle2 : 1> and <Rectangle2 : 2>.
If you are using a symbol from the Symbol Library, the connection point is named
<TBSymbolx : n>, where TBSymbolx represents the specific name of the symbol.

Attach a Symbol to a Connector


You can attach a symbol, such as a text box or a meter, to a connector. Attaching is different
from connecting. An attached symbol moves with a connector but does not account for flow
direction.
To attach a symbol to a connector:
1. Click Edit > Display to open the Display Properties dialog box.
2. Be sure the Enable Connector Attachments option is selected. Click OK.
3. Create the subordinate symbol and drag and drop it across the connector. The subordinate
attachment is attached to the connector. The placement is snapped either left/right or
top/bottom depending upon the orthogonal direction of the connector at the position
where the attachment has been placed.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

139

Work with Symbols

Note: To remove an attached symbol from a connector, click the symbol and drag it
away from the connector.

Attach a Symbol as an Adjunct to Another Symbol


You may want to attach two or more symbols so that they move together but do not become a
composite symbol. For example, you might attach a text label symbol to a pump symbol. The
text symbol is subordinate to the pump symbol and follows the pump symbol if the latter is
moved.
The advantage of this method of attachment is that each symbol in the group retains its
identity and can be acted on individually for automation purposes.
1. Select at least two symbols. This enables the Symbol Attachments icon

2. Click the Symbol Attachments icon, or


Click Edit > Symbol Attachments, or
On the right-click menu, click Symbol Attachments.
The Symbol Attachments dialog box appears. The symbols you selected appear as
master or subordinate symbols. The first symbol selected becomes the master, the
subsequent ones are subordinates.

3. Select the Master Symbol. As you change the master, the title of the dialog box changes
also.
4. Place a check mark for the subordinate symbol or symbols and click OK.
5. Repeat the process for each master symbol. The Detach All bar at the top can be used to
remove all attachments from the currently selected symbol in the Master box. To detach
only one attachment, clear its check box.

140

Connectors

6. Click OK. When you move a master symbol, any subordinates move with it.

Connectors Dialog box

Use the Connectors dialog box to rearrange connections. To reach this dialog box:
Click the Connectors toolbar button.
-orClick Edit > Connectors.
-orOn the right-click menu, click Connectors.
The Connectors dialog box affects connector symbols only. It cannot be used to attach one
symbol to another symbol without a connector. The Connectors dialog box has two tabs,
Flow (page 141) and Attachments (page 142). Each connector is identified by a unique
name, which is revealed by a ToolTip in your display.
Configure the Flow of a Connector
The Connectors Dialog box, Flow tab specifies the source and destination of each connector
from one symbol's connection point to another symbol's connection point. The dialog box is
available whenever a Connector exists on a display.
The Flow tab shows two tree diagrams, Source and Destination, where you can change the
connection points for the connector shown in the Connector drop-down box. There is also a
Flow Direction drop-down box associated with the connector that appears in the Connector
drop-down box.
The Auto Avoid option is checked as a default, so that connectors route around other objects
in the display.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

141

Work with Symbols

1. In Build mode, open the Connectors dialog box (page 141). The Flow tab is in focus.
Note: Hover over any symbol or connector on a display for a ToolTip to identify the
connector you wish to rearrange.

2. In the Connector drop-down box, select a Connector. Connection points for the selected
connector appear highlighted in the Source and Destination boxes.
3. [optional] Modify the Flow Direction.
4. Click a new Connection Point on the Source tree to change the source connection point.
5. Click a Connection Point on the Destination tree to change the destination connection
point.
Note: As you adjust connection points in the Connectors dialog box, the
corresponding connector in your display also provides visual indicators to help
you see how your changes will appear.

6. Click Apply. This changes the display.


7. Repeat these steps for all connectors on the display that you wish to modify.
8. Click OK.
Configure Attachments to a Connector
For very complex displays, it may be helpful to attach or arrange connector attachments
through the Connectors Dialog box, Attachments tab.

142

Connectors

1. In Build mode, create a connector.


2. Create the auxiliary symbol to be added to the connector.
3. Open the Connectors dialog box (page 141), and select the Attachments tab.
4. Choose a connector from the Connector drop-down box. Unattached symbols on the
display are listed in the Unattached Symbols box. Symbols that are already attached to
the connector appear in the Currently Attached box. Existing source and destination
symbols that are connected to connectors are not listed.
5. Highlight a symbol in the Unattached Symbols box that you want to add and click Add.
The symbol now appears in the Currently Attached box.
Note: The Unattached Symbols box does not include Connectors or symbols
attached to other symbols.

6. Adjust the position and placement of the attached symbol as needed.

To move the symbol closer to one end of the connector, double-click the specified %
and change it.
To move the symbol from the top of the connector to another placement, double-click
the default Top and choose Left, Right, or Bottom.

7. Click Apply and select another connector to adjust.


8. If you need to remove an attachment, highlight the attachment in the Currently
Attached box and click Remove.
9. When you are finished adjusting, click OK.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

143

Work with Symbols

Detect Connections and Attachments


To see whether connectors or attached symbols exist for a particular symbol click the symbol
or connector and hold down the mouse button.

If there are existing connectors, all connectors with attached symbols for that symbol are
highlighted and display in a different color (for example, white for black or yellow for
blue).

If there are no connectors, nothing happens.

Reroute a Connector Path


When you move a symbol, its connectors shift automatically to stay connected to the moved
symbol and avoid overlapping other symbols in the display. Connectors can overlap each
other.
If a drawing becomes complex, you can request that all connectors be rerouted by clicking
the Reroute button. If you select specific connectors and click Reroute, only those
connectors are rerouted. Connectors crossing each other may be unavoidable but should be
minimized. Do not move connectors manually.
The object avoidance feature in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook can either ignore or take
connectors into account when looking for the shortest path from the source to a destination.
This behavior is controlled by the ConnectorsAvoidConnectors setting in
ProcBook.ini (page 214).
Note: Object avoidance does not occur after you drag and drop a connectors line
segment. If you modify the position of a connector manually, the center point and
end points on the connector change from green to red, indicating that automatic
object avoidance is turned off and you are responsible for all further updates to
that connector.

Rerouting can consume significant system resources (CPU and Memory) to solve complex
problems. Factors that can increase complexity include:

A very large display

Large numbers of Connectors on a single display

Large numbers of symbols to be avoided

A high number of "Lines per Screen Unit" (set in "Arrange", "Grid Size", "Lines per
Screen Unit"1 equals the largest cell size; 30 gives the smallest cell size)

Routing multiple displays on the same PC

Item Definition

144

Status Report for Dynamic Symbols

Use the Item Definition button in either Build or Run mode when you want to see what tags
and formatting options were used in any symbol that uses a dialog box for basic
configuration. It is the same as double-clicking on the item with the Build mode pointer. If
the symbol does not have a definition dialog box, the button is dimmed. You can change the
selections and save the new definition. This button does not open any of the formatting dialog
boxes (for example, Font or Color).

Display or Change Item Definition


1. In either Build or Run mode, open a display.
2. Double-click the dynamic symbol whose definition you would like to change (such as a
value, bar, trend, or button).
-orClick the symbol, then on the Formatting toolbar, click the Item Definition button. A
definition dialog box displays that corresponds to the symbol you selected:
Note: If the Item Definition button appears dimmed the symbol you selected may
not have a definition dialog box.

3. In the appropriate dialog box, make your changes to the item's definition, and then click
OK. These changes are saved with the symbol.

Status Report for Dynamic Symbols


The Status Bar at the bottom of the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook application shows
whether dynamic symbols in a display are updating normally. The Status icon is a green
circle when there are no errors. It is a blue circle containing a question mark (?) if the display
shows questionable data or a yellow arrow for substituted data. It contains an X in a red circle
if a dynamic symbol is reporting bad data (or shutdown status). As you shift focus from one
display to another, the icon may change. If you shift back to the Table of Contents, the status
icon remains from the last display in focus.
or
The Status Report dialog box appears when you have a display in focus and double-click the
Status icon. This report lists all the symbols in a display that have data associated with them.
You see the tag to which the symbol is connected and, if there is an issue, the error message
appears. You can sort the list by any of the column headings.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

145

Work with Symbols

For troubleshooting purposes, the Message Log button shows you the SDK Log file.
You can save this report as a .csv file by using the Save to File button.
Note: The Status Bar can be displayed or hidden from the View Status Bar item on the
View menu.

Status Flags for Data


In addition to the Error indicator shown in the Status Bar (page 145), FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook has three types of flags to indicate that the data is valid but additional
information is available. Each dynamic symbol can display an icon when there is additional
status information available. When move your pointer over a flagged symbol, a ToolTip
appears with the status message. In trends, status messages appear to the right of the tag
values in the legend if the status is associated with the last value on the plot.
The icons are shown below:

Questionableindicates that there is some reason to doubt the accuracy of the value.

Substitutedused to indicate that the value has been changed from its original value.
This value is set only by the Historian Server when an existing value is changed.

Annotatedindicates that there is a comment about a value. Text annotations are


shown in symbol ToolTips. Use the Details window (page 127) to view and add
annotations.

If a tag has more than one flag, the highest priority status will be shown. The priority from
high to low is: Questionable, Substituted, Annotated. To view all the flags associated with a
Historian Tag on the display, use the Details window, Data option.

146

Status Flags for Data

If you clear the Show Value Attributes check box in your Start Preferences, you do not see
these icons. Consider disabling the icons to improve ProcessBook performance if you have
very high speed sub-second data.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

147

Chapter 7

FactoryTalk Historian System Data


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook allows you to view FactoryTalk Historian System data from a variety
of sources, including Historian Points, AF element attributes, and Historian Calculation data sets
(expression or summary).

About FactoryTalk Historian data


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook retrieves and helps you visualize data from your
FactoryTalk Historian System and other systems that support different business functions and
provide access to diverse information.
You will likely work with FactoryTalk Historian data stored in:

Historian Server

Asset Framework (AF)

You will typically use these items to specify the information you want to see:
Historian Points/Historian Tags
A Historian point is a stream of real-time data from a defined source, and is described by a
corresponding tag name and other attributes. Historian Points are frequently referred to as
Historian tags, and the terms are used somewhat interchangeably. However, a tag is simply a
reference name for a Historian point.
AF Assets
AF Assets are the building blocks of AF (like modules in MDB) and can represent either
physical or logical entities in your process, such as a physical device, piece of equipment,
storage container, or representative section of a process.
AF Attributes
AF attributes represent data that is associated with an element. They can contain
configuration information for the element, or measured or calculated process data that
provides the information necessary for getting and setting its value to and from a data stream.
Conceptually, an AF attribute replaces the Historian aliases and Historian properties that were
used in the Historian Module Database.
AF attributes are children of AF elements.
Different types of data perform different functions:
Time Series Data

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

149

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

Historian Server data is collected and stored in the form of points, each of which represents a
time-series data stream from a particular source, such as a temperature or pressure sensor. A
tag is a reference name for a Historian point.
Calculated Data
Statistical calculations allow you to view Averages, High and Low values, and measures of
variance. These all provide critical information about data events over a period of time.
Contextual Data
Contextual data is a method of associating Historian Points and their properties with their
business use, location, service or role. A content creator can configure contextual data to
reflect the structure of the information, making data and its presentation more logical and
accessible. A Historian point tag name is an example of contextual data.
Historian Points also have various configurable properties associated with the data, called
point attributes. However, this information is presented largely in language relevant to data
processing, not in measurements or standard business terms that are easily accessible to users
outside the Operations department.
AF provides a holding place for contextual representations of all data used in your
FactoryTalk Historian System. Elements and attributes can reference Historian Points and
attributes or data in other systems, including relational databases and web services.

Historian Time
Historian Time abbreviations and Historian Time expressions allow you to specify times and
time ranges for data using constants, variables, and short expressions.
Historian Time Abbreviations
An interval is a unit of time that can be used in time entries. Intervals that support fractional
values are listed below. For intervals where the Fractions column indicates No, fractional
amounts cannot be used in time strings.
Name

Short name

Plural name

Member names

Fractions

second

seconds

no

yes

minute

minutes

no

yes

hour

hours

no

yes

day

days

no

no

month

mo

months

yes (for example, December)

no

year

years

no

no

week

weeks

no

no

weekday

wd

weekdays

yes (for example, Tuesday)

no

yearday

yd

yeardays

no

no

You can spell out month and weekday names, or enter the first three letters (for example,
Dec, Tue).
Historian Times can also be expressed using certain constants:
150

About FactoryTalk Historian data

Constant

Result

The current time.

Today or t

12:00 am of the current day.

Yesterday or y

12:00 am of the previous day.

Sunday or sun

00:00:00 (midnight) on the most recent past Sunday (in reference


to the Historian Server).

Historian Time Expressions


Historian allows three types of time expressions: relative time, combined time, and absolute
time:
Expression

Description

Examples

Relative Time

Relative time expressions specify a number of days,


hours, minutes, or seconds with either a leading plus
sign or a leading minus sign.
In the absence of a reference time (such as * or an
absolute time) in either the start or end time strings, the
end time is calculated relative to current clock time and
the start time is calculated relative to the end time.

+1d
-24h
-3m
+24s

Combined
Time

A combined time expression is a specific reference time


followed by a relative time expression.

*+8h
18-dec-02 3m
t+32s

Absolute Time

An absolute time expression is any time expression that


is neither a relative nor a combined time expression.

*
14-Dec-97
11-Nov-96
2:00:00.0001
t
y

When using Historian Times, follow these guidelines:

Use absolute or combined time expressions. Avoid using relative time expressions.
Multiple relative time expressions in a time range may cause an incorrect start time or an
error message, depending on the context of the expression.

Relative and combined time expressions contain only a single operator: either a single
plus sign (+) or a single minus sign (-). Additional operators can lead to unpredictable
results. For example, the following are not valid time expressions:
*+1d+4h
T-1d+12h

The name or short name for an interval used to denote Historian Time is not casesensitive.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

151

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

Historian Time String Examples


Time Syntax Examples
Historian Time String

Meaning

06-dec-91 15:00:00

3:00:00 pm on December 6, 1991

Current time (now)

25

00:00:00 (midnight) on the 25th of the current


month

25-aug-92

00:00:00 (midnight) on August 25th, 1992

8:

08:00:00 on the current date

25 8:

08:00:00 on the 25th of the current month

00:00:00 on the current date (today)

00:00:00 on the previous date (yesterday)

sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri, sat

00:00:00 on the most recent Sunday, Monday, ...


Saturday

*-1h

One hour ago

t+8h

8:00:00 am today

y-8h

4:00:00 pm on the day before yesterday

mon+14.5h

2:30:00 pm last Monday

sat-1m

11:59:00 pm last Friday

Time Interval Examples


In interval expressions, a positive or unmarked interval is based on the starttime, and a
negative interval is based on the endtime of a time expression.
For example, if starttime is y, endtime is t, and interval is +5h for a Sampled Data function,
then interpolated values are generated at y, y+5h, y+10h, y+15h, and y+20h. If the interval is
-5h, the interpolated values are generated at y+4h, y+9h, y+14h, y+19h and t.

152

Historian Time
String

Meaning

1.5h

One and one-half hours

32m

Thirty-two minutes

49s

Forty-nine seconds

+5h

Five hours added to the time beginning with


the starttime

-5h

Five hours subtracted from the time


beginning with the endtime

Historian Tags (Historian Points)

Historian Tags (Historian Points)


A Historian point is a stream of real-time data from a defined source, and is described by a
corresponding tag name and other attributes. Historian Points are frequently referred to as
Historian tags, and the terms are used somewhat interchangeably. However, a tag is simply a
reference name for a Historian point.

Historian Server
The Historian Server is a time-series database that collects, stores, and retrieves numerical
and string data. The Historian Server resides on a host computer and is connected to
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook through your network.
When you open a display containing dynamic symbols, FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
retrieves data from the Historian Server.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook also notifies the Historian Server that it would like to
receive data whenever the readings for the dynamic symbols change. Each time a reading
changes for points in the display, the information is recorded in the Historian Server. This
new information is sent to your displays and all the new values are added to trend traces. This
is true even if you reduce the display to an icon (page 49).

Updates to FactoryTalk Historian data


When a display is opened, current values of Historian tags are used for dynamic elements
other than trends and XY plots. For trends and XY plots, the time scale is configurable on a
plot-by-plot basis.
Displays are updated whenever values change. Every five seconds, FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook Displays any new values for tags in open displays from each Historian Server.
You can modify the update rate in the procbook.ini file.
For trends, new values are added to the trend traces. This update by exception algorithm has
two benefits:

Values that do not change are not sent over the network at every update. This can be a
significant efficiency improvement over traditional scanning.

Values that change more than once within five seconds are shown accurately on trends
because all of the changes are delivered to FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.

Values from Historian Calculations and custom data sets are also updated dynamically.

Historian Tag Search


The Tag Search dialog box is used to locate Historian tags. To launch this dialog box:
On the Standard toolbar, click the Tag Search button

-or-

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

153

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

Click the Tag Search button in any of the following dialog boxes:

Define Value

Define Bar

Define XYPlot

Multi-State Symbol

Define Trend

The Tag Search dialog box provides three types of searches:

Basic Search allows you to create a tag mask by specifying Historian Point Attributes.
The mask is used to find a list of tags on the server with matching attributes.

Advanced Search provides a query-building interface with access to more point


attributes for complex searches.

Alias Search provides a logical tree view of a Historian Server through the Historian
Module Database, which you can use to select tags by their descriptive aliases.

To search for tags:


1. Click a tab to choose a Basic, Advanced or Alias search.
2. Enter the required search criteria and click Search.

154

Historian Tags (Historian Points)

Use '*' or '?' as wildcard characters to search for tag names and attributes. For example,
the tag mask Tem* returns all point names that start with Tem while Tem? returns only
points that start with Tem and end with another single character. All point mask fields are
case insensitive.
You can also click Favorites to access previous searches.
3. Tags returned from a search appear listed in a search results panel. Select the desired tags
in the results panel, and click OK.
Click column headers in the search results panel to sort the results. Ctrl-click or
Shift-click to select multiple tags.
For more information on Historian tags click the Help button from any Tag Search dialog
box in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook to launch the PI SDK Controls and Dialogs user
help.

View Point Attributes


The configuration information for a Historian point is stored as a list of attributes. You can
display this list of properties for any dynamic symbol. See Historian Point Attributes (page
156) for a complete list of attributes and their descriptions.
The Point Attributes dialog box displays the attributes and snapshot values of Historian
Points.
1. Using either the Run mode or Build mode pointer, click a dynamic symbol.
2. On the standard toolbar click the Tag Properties button

, or

click the Pt. Attr. (Point Attributes) button if you are in the Tag Search dialog box, or
in Run mode, click Tools > Point Attributes.
The Point Attributes dialog box appears.
Note: You can also view Point Attributes in the Details Window (page 127).

The tag for which the properties are displayed is shown in the Point Name drop-down list at
the top of the dialog box. If a trend has several tags, select each tag from the drop-down list
or use the up and down arrows on your keyboard to scroll through the tags.
The Point Properties dialog box contains the Categorized tab and the Alphabetic tab.
The Categorized tab displays the attributes categorically. The following categories are
always displayed:

Archive
Classic
Display
Overview
Security
System

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

155

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

These categories include all the attributes from the Base PointClass. The Base PointClass
attributes are common to all Historian Points. If the Historian point that is being displayed is
not from the Base PointClass, there is one additional category. This category is given the
name of the PointClass to which the displayed Historian point belongs. The PointClassspecific attributes are displayed in this category.
The Alphabetic tab displays the attributes alphabetically.
Historian Point Attributes

156

Attribute

Explanation

Descriptor

26-character tag descriptor

Exdesc

80-character extended tag descriptor

typicalvalue

Typical value

Units

Engineering unit string

Zero

Zero

Span

Span

digstartcode

Code for the first digital state string for the tag

dignumber

Number of digital states minus 1

pointtype

Point type character

pointsource

Point source character

location1

Location parameter 1

location2

Location parameter 2

location3

Location parameter 3

location4

Location parameter 4

location5

Location parameter 5

filtercode

Filter code

squareroot

Square root flag

scan

Scan flag

excdev

Exception deviation in percent of span

excmin

Exception minimum time in seconds

excmax

Exception maximum time in seconds

archiving

Archiving flag

compressing

Compression flag

Res

Resolution code

compdev

Compression deviation in percent of span

compmin

Compression minimum time in seconds

compmax

Compression maximum time in seconds

totalcode

Totalization code

convers

Conversion factor for postprocessed points

Historian Tags (Historian Points)

Attribute

Explanation

displaydigits

Controls the format of numeric values on terminal-based Historian screens

instrumenttag

Tagname for value in another system; used by some interfaces

sourcept

Tagname for output to other systems; used by some interfaces

taglong

Long tagname (up to 80 characters)

tagshort

12 character tagname

creator

Creator of the tag

createdate

Creation date of the tag

changer

User who modified the tag's attributes

changedate

Change date of the tag

pointnumber

ID number reused upon deletion of a point

pointid

Unique internal ID number not reused upon deletion of a point

Historian Server Data Types


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook handles a full range of Historian Server data types, as
shown in this table:
Point Type

How It Is Used

PB Support

Digital

Used for points whose value can only be one of


several discrete states, such as ON/OFF or
Red/Green/Yellow.

Supported

Int16

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook supports


these as integers. Used for points whose
values are 15-bit unsigned integers (0 to
32767).

Supported

Int32

Negative integer values are supported. Used


for points whose values are 32-bit signed
integers (- 2147450880 to 2147483647).
Historian reserves some values.

Supported for positive and


negative Integer values

Float16

Used for floating point values, scaled. The


accuracy is one part in 32767.

Supported
Use the displaydigits
attribute to determine the
precision to display.

Float32

Used for single-precision floating- point values,


not scaled.

Supported
Use the displaydigits
attribute to determine the
precision to display.

Float64

Used for double-precision floating- point


values, not scaled.

Supported

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

157

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

Point Type

How It Is Used

PB Support

String

Each string event represents an ad- hoc state


in a series. Used to store string data of up to
976 characters.

On plots, each string event


represents an ad-hoc state
in a series; not supported
on logarithmic traces,
multi-state configurations,
or bar symbols.

Blob

Binary large object Used to store any type of


binary data up to 976 bytes.

Not supported

Timestamp

Plotted as seconds over a given range. Not


supported for logarithmic traces. Used to store
values of type Timestamp. Any Time/Date in
the Range 1-jan-1970 to 1-Jan-2038

Plotted as seconds over a


given range. Not supported
for logarithmic traces,
multi-states, or bar
symbols.

Element Relative Display (ERD)


Element Relative Display (ERD) is an add-in that replaces the hierarchical, Module
Database (MDB)-based Module Relative Display add-in from earlier versions of FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook with an asset store based on AF elements and their associative
attributes. This approach allows you to organize and structure FactoryTalk Historian System
and other data according to objects users are most familiar with, and then visualize that data
in a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Display.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook allows you to search an AF database for elements and
their attributes. You can then add these data items to dynamic symbols to graphically display
this data in real-time. For more information on AF and elements, see About FactoryTalk
Historian data (page 149).
Note: In order to convert a legacy Module Relative Display to an Element Relative Display
you must first migrate modules in the Module Database to elements in the AF database. MDB
to AF migration (page 209) is handled upon upgrade to FactoryTalk Historian 3.0. See the
Historian MDB to AF Transition Guide for further details.
See Also
Migrate a Module Relative Display (MRD) to an Element Relative Display (ERD) 211

Connect to an AF Database
Use the Select Database dialog box to find and connect to AF databases.

158

Click File > PI Systems. The Select Database dialog box appears.

Element Relative Display (ERD)

Use the System drop-down list to connect to an AF server that contains an AF database
you wish to use. The (...) button launches the Systems dialog box, where you can connect
to other AF servers.

Once you select an AF server, search for an AF database using the Databases search box.
Select a database and click OK. The database you select is used by the Element Relative
Display (page 158) add-in, where you can populate symbols with AF elements from the
database.

Add Element Relative Data to a Dynamic Symbol


Use the Select Attributes dialog box to add AF elements and AF attributes as data items to
dynamic symbols on a display.
1. In Build mode, double-click a dynamic symbol. This opens the Define <symbol> dialog
box.
2. Click the arrow next to the Tag Search button. A drop-down menu appears.

Note: If you plan to work with an element that does not have multiple contexts you
can instead click AF2. This brings up the Select AF Attribute dialog box, and
gives you another way of searching for AF data.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

159

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

3. Click Element Relative. The Select Attributes dialog box appears.

The active elements in the Elements of Interest pane on the Element Relative Display
docking window appear in the top pane of this dialog box under Current Element of
Interest. If an element has attributes, those attributes are available to add to a dynamic
symbol.
Note: If there are no active elements in the Elements of Interest pane, the Element
Search dialog box appears instead of the Select Attributes dialog box,
allowing you to do a new search to populate the Elements of Interest pane.

4. Click attribute names to select from the Attributes for the selected element list.
5. Click the
button to add the selected attributes to the Selected Attributes list. Apply
the following option if desired:

UOMallows you to select a unit of measure for a given attribute.

6. [Optional] Click the Add Element Name button to add the element name of the current
context to the symbol. Select the Use Full Path checkbox to show the full path of the
current context instead of just the element name.
7. Click OK to add the selected attribute(s) to your dynamic symbol.

AF Context Path
A context path relates an AF attribute to a parent element within an AF database. An attribute
added as a data item to a dynamic symbol can point to different underlying Historian Points,
depending on its context path.

160

Element Relative Display (ERD)

Use context paths to drive displays created in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook and other
Historian client applications. Displays that utilize context paths in this manner are referred to
as element-relative because the data displayed for the attribute at any time depends on the
context path that links the attribute to a parent element.
Context paths are used most frequently to change the data displayed by a symbol based on
user selection. For example, based on the selection of AF elements or attributes that represent
assets in a plant, a display may present data from parallel assets in a single plant or in
different locations.
For example, assume Tanks 1-5 in a plant are all described by the same measurement
attributes of temperature and pressure. Each tank is represented as an element in the AF
database with corresponding temperature and pressure attributes. A display that references
the temperature attribute could display data for each tank in turn by allowing the user to
specify the context path to any particular tank element.

Change AF Element Context


Configure a dynamic symbol with element relative data by adding attributes from a specific
element to a display. You can dynamically change the context for the selected element on
your symbols by clicking an element name in the Elements of Interest pane on the Element
Relative Display window. The attribute data that appears on your dynamic symbol
corresponds to the active element you choose. If the attributes you select are not available for
a selected element, you see No Data on the display when that element is selected.
To use the Element Relative Display window:
1. Click View > Element Relative Display. The Element Relative Display window
appears.

2. In the Search Mask text box enter a search query, and click the green arrow, or

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

161

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

a. Click the Element Search button


to launch the Element Search dialog box,
where you can use advanced search fields.
b. Enter your search query and click the Search button. The Search results list is
populated with your results.
c. Click any element(s) from the Search results list.
d. Click OK. Any new items are added to the Elements of Interest list in the Element
Relative Display docking window.
3. Search results appear in the Elements of Interest pane.

Click a column heading to sort results by that heading.


Use the Filter text box to filter out unwanted entries. Access previously used filter
expressions by clicking the small triangle at the end of the text box.
Select the Group by check boxes to group your search results by template.
Hover over an element to display a ToolTip that show the element's full path.

4. Click an item from the Elements of Interest pane. If there is a corresponding attribute in
your display, that attribute's data will refresh with the new element context.
Note: Use the pin icon
to lock the docking window to your screen. Click the pin icon
again to unpin the window and minimize it along the border of your FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook window. When a docking window is unpinned, a button
appears along the side of the screen. Hover over it to re-expand the window.

Data Sets
In FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook you can build dynamic symbols using data retrieved
from data sets just as you can from specific points in the Historian Server.
A data set is basically the set of results of a query that addresses a specific data source. You
can use placeholders to link Historian tags and ODBC data within a query.
Data sets are defined at the Book level so that they can be defined once and then shared
among different displays within that ProcessBook. If you create an independent display (a
.PDI file), the data set is defined only for that display. Trends including data sets can be
manipulated, saved, moved, and copied in the same fashion as other trends.
Whenever a display is updated, if a trace or value using a data set is configured using relative
times, then the trace or value is updated. No updates occur if the data set is configured using
absolute times.
You can edit an existing data set, either from the Tools menu or from a symbol that uses the
data set. However, if you have attached the data set to more than one symbol, editing the data
set affects all the symbols. If you move a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Display
containing a data set to another machine, you may need to reconfigure the data set or the
machine's connection to the data source.

162

Data Sets

Three types of data sets are available to provide data to displays:

Historian Calculation (page 163) data sets (including Historian Expression and Historian
Summary data sets) from Historian Servers using Historian Performance Equation
syntax. These expressions provide summary data, such as averages, minimums,
maximums, etc., or calculations such as the sum of two Historian point values.

ODBC (page 167) (Open Database Connectivity) data sets obtained from a relational
database.

Custom (page 169) data sets built as COM objects supplied by Visual Basic or C++
programs as Add-Ins to FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.

Historian Calculation Data Sets


Historian Calculation Data Sets include Historian Summary Data Sets and Historian
Expression Data Sets. These are drawn from the Historian Server and plotted dynamically.
Use the PI Calculation dialog box to create, edit, or delete data sets. You can select
predetermined calculations or create your own expressions. A similar dialog box is used to
configure ODBC data sets (page 167).

PI Summary Data Sets


Historian Summary Data Sets enable you to use pre- determined functions to retrieve
aggregated FactoryTalk Historian data for a tag.

The AVG function calculates the average of the tag values for each interval.
The Count function is the sum of event count over the time range when calculation
basis is event-weighted, sum of event time duration over the time range when
calculation basis is time-weighted.
The MIN function selects the minimum of the tag values for each interval. A
timestamp associated with the minimum value is also available.
The MAX function selects the maximum of the tag values for each interval. A
timestamp associated with the maximum value is also available.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

163

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

The PCTGOOD function determines the percentage of time for each interval, when
the tags archived values are good (that is without errors, such as out of range errors
or shutdown flags). It is not applicable for digital tags.
The PSTDEV function calculates the population or sample standard deviation of two
or more values.
The RANGE function calculates the difference between the tags maximum and
minimum values for each interval.
The STDEV function calculates the population Standard Deviation of the tag values
for each interval.
The Total function is the total over the given time range.

These functions are fully described in the Performance Equations chapter of the
FactoryTalk Historian Server SE Server Applications User Guide.

PI Expression Data Sets


Historian Expression Data Sets enable you to create your own function or expression in
Historian Performance Equation syntax. These expressions can include tag variables with
mathematical and logical operations as described in the Performance Equations chapter
of the FactoryTalk Historian SE Server Applications User Guide.

Create a Historian Calculation Data Set


1. Click Tools > Data Sets. The Data Sets (page 162) dialog box appears.
Note: You can also create a Historian Calculation data set by clicking the drop-down
arrow next to the Tag Search button in the Define dynamic symbol dialog
boxes. By accessing the Historian Calculation Data dialog box this way, you
have the additional option of selecting a previously created Historian
Calculation Data set, as well as the ability to create a new one as outlined
below.

2. Click New > PI Calculation. The PI Calculation Data dialog box appears.

164

Data Sets

3. Enter values for the following fields:

ServerSelect a Historian Server.


NameEnter a name for your data set. The name must be unique for the current
.piw or .pdi file.
PI Tag or ExpressionEnter a tag name or a Historian expression. Use the Tag
Search (page 153) button to search for Historian Tags. If you choose to type an
expression, be sure to use Performance Equations syntax, such as one of these:
sinusoid * 2
(cdt158+sinusoid)/2
log(cdt158)
(sinusoid)/tagspan(sinusoid)

DescriptionThis description appears on trends of this data set in the tag descriptors
area.
Calculation IntervalThe interval (minutes, hours, days) for the calculation.
Interval Sync TimeThis is the absolute time of day at which the periodic
calculations are done. For example, if the Interval Sync Time box is set to 12:00:24
PM and the time in the Refresh Interval box is set to ten minutes, then the
calculation for each period is executed at the following times: 12:10:24, 12:20:24,
12:30:34, etc.
Value Column NameThe name that represents the value column of the calculated
data rather than the time stamp column.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

165

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

Refresh IntervalThe interval at which you want to automatically update the data
set. You can also type a number between 0 and 999. If you select 0, data is not
automatically updated.
Stepped PlotSelected by default. Clear the check box if you want a point-to-point
plot.

4. Click OK to save your changes.

The data set name must be unique for the current .piw or .pdi file.
The node name and tag name must be valid.
The interval must be a valid Historian Time.
The sync time must be a valid Historian Time.

5. Your new data set appears in the Data Sets dialog box.
Intervals and Time Value
The calculated value for each interval is plotted at the start of the interval. For example, if the
tag "t_min" has the following time-value pairs in a 10 minute interval, then the calculated
value for this interval would be plotted at time 1:00:00.
1:00:00 1
1:01:00 2
1:02:00 3
1:03:00 4
1:04:00 5
1:05:00 6
1:06:00 7
1:07:00 8
1:08:00 9
1:09:00 10
1:10:00 11
The calculated value for the AVG, STDEV, and PCTGOOD functions includes the tag value
at the lower interval boundary time and excludes the tag value at the upper interval boundary
time. For the example above, the tag value "10" at time 1:09:00 is excluded in the function
calculation, therefore the calculated value for AVG is 4.5 and the calculated value for
STDEV is 2.872281.
The calculated value for the MIN, MAX and RANGE functions includes the tag value of
both the lower and upper interval boundary times. For the example above, the calculated
value for MIN is 1, the calculated value for MAX is 11 and the calculated value for RANGE
is 12.

166

Data Sets

Plot a Moving Average in a Trend


You can plot additional statistics in a trend using data sets derived from Historian tags. For
example, you can plot both a tag and its moving average to show a smoothed version of the
same curve. The moving average is built from the source tag using a data set that recalculates
an average point value over recurring intervals.
To create a moving average in a trend:
1. In Build mode, double-click on the trend to open the Define Trend dialog box.
2. Click the Tag Search arrow and choose PI Calculation to create a data set based on a
tag.
3. Click New to add the data set and specify a Name and Description for the data set that
calculates the moving average.
4. Click Tag Search and select the tag you want to use as the basis for the calculation.
5. In the Interval field, choose the calculation period for the average. A new average tag
value is computed at each interval over the plotted time range.
6. Click Average in the Columns panel to select an average calculation, and click OK.
7. Click OK to close the Define Trend dialog box.

ODBC Data Sets


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook uses the term ODBC data set for the concept of an
ODBC query that retrieves data from a relational database outside of the FactoryTalk
Historian System to produce a group of data values organized into rows and columns and
used to build a trend or other element in a ProcessBook display. A data set is identified within
a ProcessBook by a unique name.
The data set name refers to the combination of an SQL query statement and an ODBC Data
Source with which to execute the query. The results of the SQL query are organized into rows
and columns. You may select any column of the results for a display. For example, in a trend,
each column in the data set that you select appears as a different trace.
A SQL query statement may be written so that it executes based on other data in a display,
such as Historian tags or the start or end time. This is done using SQL placeholders
(parameters); a tag, time, or text string is then substituted for each placeholder at run time.
Create an ODBC Data Set
1. Click Tools > Data Sets. The Data Sets (page 162) dialog box appears.
2. Click the New button, then select ODBC. The ODBC Data dialog box appears.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

167

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

3. In the Name box, type a name for the data set.


4. In the Description box, type a description if you like. This text is displayed in the
Description legend for the trace, if configured.
5. In the Refresh Interval list, enter the interval at which you want to automatically update
the data set.
-orType a number between 0 and 999.
Note: The default for the Refresh Interval is zero minutes. This means the data set
only refreshes when the trace is first drawn or when you click the Revert Time
Ranges button on the standard toolbar. If a tag placeholder is used, the
Refresh Interval box list is disabled and the data is refreshed whenever the
Historian Tag value changes,.

6. From the Data Source drop-down list, click the appropriate ODBC data source. If you do
not already have an ODBC Data Source configured on your computer (using the Control
Panel), click the Setup button to create or modify one.
7. Click the Design button.
The Microsoft Query application is displayed.
Note: If Microsoft Query is not installed, then the Design button is disabled. You can
key in the query manually. You can also copy and paste a query from another
query building tool.

8. Choose your ODBC data source and design your query.


168

Data Sets

Note: Click the Help button, if necessary, and follow Microsoft's instructions for
completing the query.

9. Click OK to return to the ODBC Data dialog box.


To verify if the query can be understood by the ODBC data source, click the Check
Syntax button.
10. Click OK.
11. If you want to use placeholders in the query, enter the appropriate WHERE clause, use
question marks (?) to denote the location of placeholders, and click the Placeholders
button. Placeholders are defined in the order in which they are encountered in the SQL
statement.
Clicking the Placeholders button causes the syntax of the query to be checked. If the
syntax is not valid, the invalid query message is displayed.
12. Click OK.

Custom Data Sets


A custom data set is one provided through a VBA add-in to FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook. It is a COM object or a .NET object with a COM wrapper that acts as an
interface between FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook and the custom data provider. The
source of data could be a data store (like MS SQL Server) or a data calculation engine.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook requests updates to the data every few seconds and
adjusts its display accordingly.
Before you can access custom data sets in a display, the Data Set add-in must be installed and
loaded through the Add-In Manager dialog box. Later, as you build a display, you select the
data set and column to be used for a symbol on a display through the symbol definition dialog
boxes. Once a custom dataset is loaded, it is available throughout the application. These data
sets are not display- or ProcessBook-specific.

Placeholders
A Placeholder in an SQL query identifies a value that is to be provided when the query is
run. You can validate a query before the actual values are provided.
The standard SQL placeholder character is (?). Placeholders are numbered in their order of
appearance, from left to right, in the query statement.
For example, the following query statement has two placeholders, one for a text string for a
sample ID and the other for a sample time.
Select value, sample_time from Lab_data where sample_ID=?
and sample_time>?
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook allows text, start times, end times, or tag values as
substitutes for placeholders.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

169

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

Processing of Placeholder Queries


Text placeholder values are substituted into a query when it is run. Start and End times are
determined when a display is opened and are substituted into queries at execution.
Historian tag Placeholder Queries
You can also use Historian tag values as placeholders. With a Historian tag placeholder, a
join is processed between the ODBC data source and the FactoryTalk Historian data source.
When a display is opened, FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook obtains Historian tag values
between the start and end time and substitutes these values into the SQL query, one at a time
(in effect, executing the query for each Historian tag value returned). The use of a tag
placeholder is shown in the SQL query statement below:
Select target from specs where product_code=?
In this example, the values of the tag in the FactoryTalk Historian System that records the
current product code are retrieved. The result set of the ODBC query is built by executing the
query once for each placeholder value. In the case of this example, that would be one query
execution for each product code found between the start and end times of the symbol.
Design Placeholder Queries
Placeholders can be customized for a symbol. You can create an ODBC data set with a set of
default placeholders. When that data set is attached to a specific symbol, the querys
placeholders can be customized for that symbol without affecting the placeholders defined for
any other symbol using that data set.
Add or Edit Placeholders
To open the Placeholders dialog box, click the Placeholders button in the ODBC Data Sets
(page 167) dialog box, or click the Custom Placeholders button on a symbol definition
dialog box. In this dialog box, you can rename placeholders, change their type or specify
values.
Note: FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook allows you to create custom placeholders for a
symbol based on a summary Data Set or a Historian Tag placeholder in an ODBC
data set. Placeholders are not allowed for expression Data Sets. The Custom
Placeholders button in symbol definition dialog boxes allows you to specify
different Historian Tags for a Historian Summary Data Set or ODBC data set with
a Historian Tag placeholder. The change applies only to the configured symbol.

170

Data Sets

1. In the Placeholder Name box, select the parameter you want to configure. The
parameters are in the same order as found in the data set query. The list is limited to the
number of parameters found in the query.
2. In the Placeholder Properties group, select the Type for the selected parameter. There
are four possible types, Text, PI Tag, Start Time, and End Time. You can optionally
change the name of the placeholder to make its purpose clear.
3. Selecting a type transforms the dialog box to allow you to enter the settings for the
selected type, if any.
If the query uses:

Text inputType the replacement text value in the Text field.


Tag valuesType a node ID and tag name or click the Tag Search button to open
the Tag Search dialog box.
Start and/or end timesNo additional configuration is used.

4. Click the Set button.


5. To configure another parameter, select it and repeat the previous steps.
6. Click OK.

Verify a Data Set is in Use


Before you modify a data source or data set, it is important to determine whether it is being
used in another display or symbol. Historian Calculation data sets and ODBC data sets are
established for an entire ProcessBook (or an independent display). Custom data sets are
installed with the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook application and are available to any
display that you open.
1. Click Tools > Data Sets. The Data Sets dialog box appears.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

171

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

2. Under Data Sets, click the data set name, then click the Show Use button. The Data Set
Use dialog box appears and displays where the data set is being used.

Data Set Details


Each Data Set is initially determined from a Data Source that must already be configured. If
the Data Source you need is not listed, click the Setup button to add it.
Once the Data Source is selected, add the query. If the Design button is unavailable you must
type in the query. If MS Query is installed correctly, the Design button will not be
unavailable. Click it to design the query.
You can check syntax after you add the query. Including question marks (?) in the query
allows placeholders to be defined.
If you wish to use placeholders from Historian in your query, establish them by clicking the
Placeholder button and completing the process on the Placeholder dialog box.

Add a Data Set to a Trend


Just as you would add Historian tags in defining a trend, you can add columns chosen from a
data set. Each column is plotted as a separate trace, however, the data set columns that appear
on your trend do not appear in the Point Properties dialog box.
If the query returns a null value, the trace displays the discontinuity. On the same trend you
can plot information from more than one data set, or from more than one column from the
same data set. The trend assumes the first time column found in the data set provides the time
stamps for the column(s) selected for trending.
You can manipulate trends containing data from data sets just as you would other trends, by
using functions such as:

Trend Zoom

Scrolling

Trend Cursor

Time Range

Revert Time Ranges

Autorange

Markers

To add a data set to a trend:


1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click the Trend button

3. Click in the display where you want to add the trend and drag the pointer to form a
rectangle into which the trend will be placed.
4. When you release the mouse button, the Define Trend (page 75) dialog box appears.

172

Data Sets

5. Click the Tag Search arrow, and then click PI Calculation.


6. The PI Calculation Data dialog box appears.
Note: If you want to display the ODBC Data dialog box instead of the PI Calculation
Data dialog box, then click the Tag Search arrow, and then select ODBC.

7. Under Saved Data Sets, click the data set you want to add to the trend.
8. Under Data Set Columns, select a column(s) to be plotted in the trend (use the SHIFT or
CTRL keys to select more than one column).
Value - value of the expression for the calculation interval and type as of the timestamp.
In the case of summary data sets, this column holds the value of the tag.
Total - the totalized value (time integral) of a tag over a given time, according to values
stored in the archive.
Average - average value of the expression for the calculation interval and type.
Minimum - minimum value of the expression for the calculation interval and type.
Maximum - maximum value of the expression for the calculation interval and type.
PctGood - the time percentage, over a given range, when a tag's archived values are good
(not digital states).
Range - the difference between a tag's maximum and minimum values during a given
time, according to values stored in the archive.
StdDev - the time-weighted standard deviation of a tag over a given time, according to
values stored in the archive.
PStDev - the standard deviation of two or more arguments, where those arguments
represent the whole population.
Count - the number of events for a point over a given time.
9. Click OK.
Note: Until you select a data set and at least one column, the OK button is dimmed.

10. The selected data set/column(s) is now listed under Tags in Plot in the Define Trend
dialog box. Select tags as desired and format the trend. If you wish to see or edit the
definitions of placeholders, click the Custom Placeholders button in the Define Trend
dialog box.
11. Click OK. Data displays on the trend.
Note: If you select the Description check box, on the Display Format tab in the Define
Trend dialog box, then the description of the data set is taken from the PI
Calculation Data dialog box and repeated for each column that is plotted. There
are usually no engineering units for a data set column.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

173

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

Time Intervals for Plotting Tags and Data Sets


The Start and End plot times on the Define Trend (page 75) dialog box are used to
determine the time range for plotting tags. However, a data set may have different time
boundaries than the plot time start and end for the tags. If the time range for the data set starts
later than the time range for the tags, the data set traces begin with X marks.

Refresh a Trend Containing a Data Set


In a display containing only data from data sets, the data is refreshed based on the Data Set
Refresh Interval, which is configured in the data set. The trend does not update again until the
Data Set Refresh Interval has expired, at which time it requests another set of values and
redraws itself. A Historian tag in a display, on the other hand, receives exception notifications
from the FactoryTalk Historian System and is updated on the display whenever the polling
period elapses (every five seconds by default).
If both Historian and data set data are to be plotted on the same trend, then the latest data set
value is continued toward the end time axis with changing Historian exception data points
until the refresh interval expires and new data are received from the data set.
If a data set has a Historian Tag placeholder, then the data set is refreshed every time a new
value is received for the Historian Tag placeholder.

Add Data Sets to Bars or Values in a Display


A single value from a data set may be added to a display as either a Value or a Bar.
In general, queries can return many rows of results. The Value or Bar uses only the data from
the last row of the results for the column you select; the rest of the results are discarded.
In many cases, you can use an order by clause to control which rows are returned first.
For example, the following query guarantees the most recent sample appears in the
ProcessBook Value field:
Select lab_val from Lab_Data where last_ID = BW
Order by Sample_time asc

Run FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook When Data Sets Are Included


When you start FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook and open an updating display, it connects
to your FactoryTalk Historian System and remains connected until you close FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook.
If you have configured data sets in a ProcessBook, FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
connects to a data source as soon as you open a display using data set results.
The first time you use a particular data source, the external database may ask you for login
information through a login dialog box. After a successful connection, FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook retains this information for use throughout the session. When you close the

174

Data Sets

session, FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook does not store your password locally because it
would be a security risk to store a password locally. If your data source is configured to use
Windows Authentication, then your network credentials are used to gain access to the data
and you are unlikely to be prompted.

Edit a Data Set


You may change the Data Source, the Data Set Refresh Interval, the Description, or the
query. However, when you change a data set, you may affect other queries that use the same
data set.
1. Click Tools > Data Sets.
2. The Data Sets (page 162) dialog box appears.
3. Under Data Sets, click the data set you want to edit, and then click the Edit button.
4. Either the PI Calculation Data dialog box or the ODBC Data dialog box displays
depending upon the data set you selected.
5. If the PI Calculation Data dialog box displays, then make your changes in the
appropriate fields.
6. If the ODBC Data dialog box displays, then do the following:
Note: To determine if Microsoft Query is installed, the application checks your MSDOS path for the existence of msquery.exe)

If the Design button is enabled, then:


1. Click the Design button. An instance of Microsoft Query is started using the current data
source and query.
2. Edit the data set in the MS Query environment.
3. Click File > Return to ProcBook when you are finished.
Note: Microsoft Query cannot edit query statements that contain placeholders.

If the Design button is disabled, then:


If Microsoft Query is not installed, the Design button is disabled; however, you can type the
query in the query text box. You can also copy and paste a query from another query building
tool.
1. Add or edit the appropriate WHERE clause in the query to edit a placeholder data set or
existing placeholders (question marks represent placeholders in the query statement).
2. Click the Placeholders button. This action causes the syntax of the query to be checked.
3. If the syntax is valid, then the Placeholders dialog box displays with the current
placeholders. If the syntax is invalid, then an invalid query message is displayed.
4. Click the Check Syntax button, to complete a syntax check of your query. The status of
the query is returned.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

175

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

5. When you have finished modifying the data set, click OK. If the data set is in use in a
display, the Confirm Data Set Modification dialog box displays.
6. If you wish to proceed, click Continue. The Data Sets dialog box appears.
7. Select the column(s) to be used and click OK to return to the dialog box.

Delete a Data Set


Before you can remove a data set from the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook list, you must
remove it from any symbols that use it. If the Data Set is a custom data set, which is a COM
object, remove it through Add-in Manager dialog box. Otherwise, use the following steps to
delete a data set first from all displays in which it is used and then from the ProcessBook
altogether.
1. Click Tools > Data Sets. The Data Sets (page 162) dialog box appears.
2. Under Data Sets, click the data set name, and then click the Show Use button to
determine if any display or symbol is using the data set.
3. Close the Data Sets dialog box.
4. Open each display in which a data set is being used and delete the data set from the
appropriate dialog box, such as the Define Trend or Define Value dialog box.
5. Save each display.
6. Reopen the Data Sets dialog box.
7. Under Data Sets, click the data set you want to delete, and then click the Delete button.
8. The data set is removed from under Data Sets in the Data Sets dialog box. If the data set
is in use, then the Can't Delete Data Set dialog box appears.

Copy a Data Set to Another ProcessBook


While data sources are configured for a computer, data sets are established for only one
ProcessBook or independent display file.
1. Open the new or target ProcessBook or independent display file.
2. Open the old or source ProcessBook or independent display file.
3. From the Tools menu, select Data Sets. The Data Sets (page 162) dialog box appears.
4. Under Data Sets, click the data set you want to copy, and then click the Copy button.
The Copy Data Sets dialog box appears.

176

Data Sets

5. From the To Open Workbook drop-down list, select the correct target, and then click
OK.

Loading Custom Data Sets


Before you can access a custom data set in a display, you must create a data set add-in and
install it on your computer. Then you must select it through the FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook Add-In Manager (page 8) dialog box.

Configure a Symbol with an AF Attribute


The AF2.x data set provides access to the AF database allowing you to configure a
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook symbol with an AF attribute.
From any symbol definition dialog box, click the Tag Search button and select AF2 to open
the Select AF Attribute dialog box.
If AF2 is not in the drop down list, it might not be loaded. Load it from Tools > Add-In
Manger.
To select an AF attribute:

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

177

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

1. Connect to an AF database.
2. Select an AF element.
3. Select an AF attribute from the drop down list or click Search to search in the AF
database.
4. Select a unit of measure in which to display the attribute.

Configure the AF2.x Data Set


To configure an AF dataset:
1. Click Tools > Data Sets to open the Data Sets dialog box.
2. Select AF2 dataset from the list.
3. Click Edit to open the AF 2.x DataSet Configuration dialog box.
4. Enter a Refresh Interval.
5. Select Do not retrieve AF Data in Build Mode to prevent data refresh while in build
mode.
Retrieving data might have a negative impact on performance while you are configuring
a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook symbol.

178

ODBC

ODBC
ODBC client capability means that without writing vendor-specific code, you can access data
from certain relational databases outside the FactoryTalk Historian System and include that
data in your FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Displays. The outside data source must be
ODBC-compliant; for example, it must provide an ODBC Driver. An outside ODBC data
source might include laboratory results, cost tables, or other sets of information that can be
obtained through SQL queries. Since access to ODBC sources is configured on a particular
computer, moving a display file that uses an ODBC data set may require the data source to be
configured on the new computer. The data source has to have the same name on the new
computer, or the data set will need to be reconfigured in the display.

ODBC Driver Manager


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook sends queries to a standardized interface from Microsoft
called the ODBC Driver Manager. The Driver Manager forwards ODBC queries to
appropriate vendor-provided drivers, which access the outside databases and return the
requested data to your ProcessBook display.

ODBC Drivers
Each DBMS (database management system), such as Microsoft SQL Server, requires a
specific ODBC Driver, provided by the vendor of the DBMS or a third party. Each driver is a
Dynamic Link Library (.dll) that implements a set of subroutine calls to retrieve data from
a particular database.
The Microsoft ODBC Driver Manager is included as a part of FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook installation.

ODBC Data Sources


An ODBC data source identifies a database a user wants to access and the information needed
to connect to that data. Examples of ODBC data sources are:

A SQL Server database, the server on which it resides, and the network protocol used to
access that server.

An Excel spreadsheet on a file server.

A directory containing a set of dBASE files you want to access.

ODBC data sources have an explicit name, are configured for a particular computer, and may
be used by any ODBC- compliant application installed on that computer.

ODBC Data Access


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook stores relational queries in data sets within ProcessBook
files. The data sets are created, stored, and accessed by name. FactoryTalk Historian
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

179

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

ProcessBook symbols can then access the data sets. The columns in the data set make up the
items that can be assigned to the trend, value, or bar. The SQL needed to retrieve data for
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook can be configured once and used by many displays and
symbols.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook must return a time and value pair(s) for display within a
symbol (trend, value, or bar). Placeholders act as parameters to an SQL function call. They
are evaluated at run time. Placeholders can take three forms: text, start/end times, or a
Historian tag name. Use the start and end time placeholders when the time limits of the query
should be determined from the trend symbol where the query is used. The Historian tag name
placeholder can be used to join FactoryTalk Historian data with relational database data. A
Historian Value is retrieved for the Historian tag and then substituted into the query.
Using ODBC requires that you install the Microsoft ODBC Driver Manager and drivers
(most operating systems already have the Driver Manager and some standard drivers
installed). You must then configure data sources (page 181) for ProcessBook and define
individual queries, called data sets.

ODBC Data Source Administrator


1. On the Windows Start menu, point to Settings, click Control Panel, double-click
Administrative Tools, and then double-click Data Sources (ODBC).
The Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box appears, or
Click Tools > Data Sets. The Data Sets (page 162) dialog box appears.
2. Click the New button, and then click ODBC.
The ODBC Data Sets dialog box appears.
3. Click the Data Source drop-down list to see what ODBC data sources you have already
configured, if any.
4. Click the Setup button.
The Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box appears.

180

ODBC

Prepare for ODBC


In order to use ODBC within your ProcessBook, you must install an ODBC driver and
configure the corresponding ODBC data source on your computer. Open the ODBC Data
Source Administrator (page 180) and click the Drivers tab to view the ODBC drivers that are
already installed on your system. See your System Administrator if you require additional
ODBC drivers.

Configure the ODBC Data Source


Once any necessary ODBC drivers are installed, you need to configure the ODBC data
sources available to the computer.
1. Open the ODBC Data Source Administrator (page 180) dialog box.
2. On the User DSN tab, under User Data Sources group, click the name of the ODBC data
source you plan to use and then click the Configure button.
The Setup dialog box for the data source you selected displays.
3. Add the ODBC data source.
Note: Click the Help button, if necessary, and follow Microsoft's instructions for
completing the dialog box.

4. When you have completed configuring the data source, click OK to return to the
Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

181

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

Note: To create data sources for any user of the computer, use the System DSN tab
instead of the User DSN tab. You can set up data sources on the System
DSN tab that are available to all users on the computer, but you must have
elevated permissions on the computer.

Use MSQuery to Build Data Sets


You can use Microsoft Query (MS Query) for writing queries. It is not distributed with
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, but if you click the Design button in the ODBC Data
dialog box, then FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook searches the registry in your computer to
locate MSQry32.exe when the ODBC data sets dialog box is opened.
Note: The MS Query application does not work with an ODBC query that includes
placeholders. Consequently, the Design button in the ODBC Data dialog box may
be disabled.

Assumptions about Timestamps and Data Sets


When a trend receives data from an ODBC data source, it receives the data as a Time / Value
pair. The Value is generated by the query. The Time, however, may be obtained in one of two
ways:

If a Tag placeholder (page 169) is used, then the time will be the time returned by the
Tag. This time will supersede any timestamps returned by the query.

One or more of the columns returned by the query may contain a date and/or time. If
more than one timestamp column is returned, the first one as ordered by the SQL query is
used.

Stored Procedures in Queries


Stored procedures can be used in ODBC data sets. They may contain placeholders as long as
your database accepts the stored procedures call as a text string. The common syntax for this
is:
execute procname ('arg', 22, ?)
Check the documentation of your database management system for details.
Stored procedures generally return results in rows and columns, just as a normal SQL query
does.
The only way to determine the columns returned by a stored procedure is to perform a test
execution. When you are building the data set, because ProcessBook needs to know the
columns returned, it executes the procedure. If the procedure call includes placeholders, the
following defaults are used:
Text

182

Actual text placeholder string

ODBC

StartTime

Current time

EndTime

Current time

Tag

An ODBC data set is created with a set of default placeholders. When it is attached to a
specific symbol, the query's placeholders can be customized for that symbol, without
affecting the placeholders defined for other symbols using that data set.
For example, you can create a query for a database of laboratory data using a text placeholder
for the sample name. You can then use a different sample name for every trend, bar, or value,
rather than defining a new data set query for each sample name.

Troubleshoot ODBC Data Sets


Data sets may be added, deleted, copied, or edited by selecting the New, Delete, Edit, or
Copy buttons in the Data Sets dialog box.
Columns are defined by the data set query. To see the columns returned by the query, select
the dataset when configuring a symbol to use it. The dialog box shown from the Data Sets
dialog box opened from the Tools menu does not show the columns.
The Show Use button opens a dialog box that indicates what displays and symbols include
data from this data set.

Trace ODBC Calls


The ODBC Driver Manger provides an option for recording a log of all calls to the Driver
Manager from all ODBC clients. The default options for ODBC are set to omit tracing and
logging ODBC calls
If you choose to trace ODBC calls, you may suffer some degradation in system performance.
Initiate Call Tracing
1. Click Tools > Data Sets. The Data Sets dialog box appears.
2. Click New. Click ODBC. The ODBC Data dialog box appears.
3. Click Setup. The ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box appears.
4. Select the Tracing tab.
5. To change the file where tracing is logged, choose a new file path in the Log File Path
text box. Use the Browse button to search for files.
6. To initiate tracing, click the Start Tracing Now button. The label changes from Start
Tracing Now to Stop Tracing Now, and the Log File Path text box becomes unavailable.
7. To stop tracing, click the Stop Tracing Now button.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

183

FactoryTalk Historian System Data

Delete an ODBC Driver


If you have deleted all data sources using a particular driver, you may uninstall it from your
system. To do this, you must use the setup program for the ODBC driver.
Note: If you delete the wrong driver you need to reload it from the vendor.

Delete an ODBC Data Source


If you remove data sources while they are in use, displays that use them fail to retrieve data.
Consequently, before you remove a data source, remove all data sets in which it is being
used. FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook cannot prevent users from removing a needed data
source from the computer.
1. Open the ODBC Data Source Administrator (page 180) dialog box.
2. On the User DSN tab, under User Data Sources, click the name of the ODBC data
source you want to delete and then click the Remove button.
A confirmation message is displayed.
3. Click the Yes button to delete the data source.
4. Click OK to close the Microsoft ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, then
close the ODBC Data dialog box.
The data source is removed from under Data Sets in the Data Sets dialog box.

Edit an ODBC Data Source


Occasionally you may want to use a different computer to access an existing ProcessBook
display.
If the display contains data from a Historian Calculation Data Set, the display works correctly
unless the new machine does not point to the same Historian Server as the previous one.
If this display contains data from an ODBC data set, you will need to reconfigure the correct
ODBC data source on the new computer. Essentially this means establishing the same ODBC
data source name that was used on the original computer. Follow the steps under Installing
ODBC Drivers, and Configuring the ODBC Data Source (page 181).
If the display contains data from a custom data set, then you must install that FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook add-in on the new machine.

184

Chapter 8

Historian Notifications in FactoryTalk Historian


ProcessBook
Historian Notifications provides FactoryTalk Historian System users the ability to configure
rules that deliver notifications by email and other delivery channels when certain conditions
are met. These conditions are configurable and are normally dependent on a number of data
inputs. Additionally, Historian Notifications can be configured to deliver various content
types to the notification contact, such as an attached PDI file or a path to a PDI file.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook includes a Historian Notifications add-in that retrieves
notifications subscribed to from your FactoryTalk Historian System, and lists them in a
window. This add-in also supports viewing and managing Contacts, which allows users to
communicate and collaborate with other users from within FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook without having to launch a separate application.

Launch Historian Notifications


Note: The add-in only loads in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook if the appropriate
Historian Notifications client software is already installed separately.

Click View > Notifications to manually open the Notifications window. The Notifications
window is automatically opened at startup if it was left open when you previously shutdown
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.
You can also launch FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook to view a notification by opening a
PDI file attached to a notification email.

About the Notifications Window


The Notifications window provides controls for viewing Historian Notifications in
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

185

Historian Notifications in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook

The title bar displays the number of active, open notifications. This number appears in
parentheses to the right of the Notifications window title, for example Notifications(2).
Use the controls at the top of the Notifications window to receive notifications (page 186) and
view notifications (page 187).
A Notification rule is a set of conditions that leads to the creation of notifications.
Notification rules and their associative notifications appear in the bottom half of the
Notifications window.
Note: Use the pin icon
to lock the docking window to your screen. Click the pin icon
again to unpin the window and minimize it along the border of your FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook window. When a docking window is unpinned, a button
appears along the side of the screen. Hover over it to re-expand the window. The
size and position of the Notifications window is saved so that it opens the same
way the next time you open FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.

Receive Notifications
In order to receive notifications in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook you need to connect to
a FactoryTalk Historian System where notification rules are established. To change the
default FactoryTalk Historian System connection in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook,
click File > PI System.
Use the icons at the top of the Notifications window to begin, pause, or resume receipt of
notifications.

186

Play icon

indicates that incoming notifications are halted.

About the Notifications Window

Pause icon
indicates that you are receiving notifications. Click this icon to stop
receiving new notifications.

Filter Notifications
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook only shows notifications for which you are subscribed.
These are shown in the Notifications window. You can filter this list with the controls
available at the top of this window.
1. In the View Notifications drop-down list, click one of the following options:

Activedisplays all open notifications. You only receive new notifications when this
option is selected.
Timerangeselect either the Start Time or End Time text box and enter a
Historian Time (page 150) string. Click the corresponding drop-down arrow to
launch a calendar to help you find a specific date.
Recententer a time period to search within the last x-number of seconds, minutes,
hours, or days.

2. Click the Go button

to view your list of filtered notifications.

Open Displays Associated with a Notification


Click the Open Display icon

in the Notifications window (page 185),

-orRight click a notification and click Open Associated Display(s).


This opens or creates displays for the content associated with the notification(s) selected in
the list. The displays are opened and have the union of the selected time ranges applied to
each symbol contained therein. This button is enabled if the selected notification items do not
have all their associated content already open in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook;
otherwise it is disabled.

Work with Notifications


Click a notification in the Notifications window (page 185) to have its time range applied to
the active display. Right click a notification to see a context menu providing the following
options:

Acknowledge Instance to acknowledge that action has been taken regarding the
notification, and that no further escalation is needed.

Acknowledge Subscription to acknowledge receipt of a notification you are subscribed


to.

Add Comment to comment on a notification.

Show Contact Events to toggle the display of contact events for each notification.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

187

Historian Notifications in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook

Show TimeSelector to toggle the display of filter options.

Expand All/Collapse All to expand or collapse a notification grouping.

View Notification Rule Summary to display the properties of the notification rule that
triggered a selected notification.

Set Time for All Displays sets the time range of all open displays to the time range of a
selected notification, or union of time ranges for multiple selected notifications.

Set Time for Associated Displays sets the time range of displays associated with the
notification rule to the time range of the notification.

Open Associated Display(s) opens the displays corresponding to the selected


notifications and applies the union of the selected time ranges to each.

Contacts Window
The Contacts window allows you to view and manage contacts from within FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook. It is split into two panes and provides the following:

Notification Contacts (page 188)

MS Office Communicator Contacts (page 189)

You do not need AF or Historian Notifications to use most features of Contacts. However, to
view the Contacts window you must have Office Communicator installed and be logged in at
the time you launch FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. See the Microsoft Office
Communicator home page for further information.
Note: Use the pin icon
to lock the docking window to your screen. Click the pin icon
again to unpin the window and minimize it along the border of your FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook window. When a docking window is unpinned, a button
appears along the side of the screen. Hover over it to re-expand the window.

Open Contacts Window


Click View > Contacts to open the Contacts docking window. The Contacts Toolbar is
located at the top of the window and displays:

User Statusdisplays your full user name and current availability. This field cannot is
not editable from within FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.

Connection buttondisplays your connection state to Office Communicator.

Notification Contacts
The Notification Contacts panel displays the list of contacts that are subscribed to the
notification you have selected in the Notifications window (page 185).

188

Contacts Window

Contacts are grouped according to type: Escalation Group, Group, and Individual. The group
heading displays the icon associated with its type in AF. This contact list is not sorted, but
appears in the order listed in AF to preserve the escalation order for an escalation group. The
first entry in the escalation list has the highest priority.
A contact's presence (page 190) is shown with an icon to the left of the contact name.

MS Office Communicator Contacts


The MS Office Communicator Contacts panel displays your contacts from MS Office
Communicator. Groups are sorted alphabetically. Contacts are sorted alphabetically within
groups. Offline contacts are placed at the end. A contact's presence (page 190) is shown with
an icon to the left of the contact name.
Filter MS Office Communicator Contacts

Enter text in the Contacts Filter text box to search for contacts. Filter results appear in this
panel. Click the Clear button to clear your filter parameters.

Work with Contacts


Right click a contact to bring up a context menu that enables you to:

View calendar availability (not available with MS Office Communicator 2005)

Send an instant message (page 190)

Send email (page 190)

Sort contacts (page 190)

View contact information (page 190)

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

189

Historian Notifications in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook

Send an Instant Message to a Contact


Right click a contact in the Contacts window and click Send Instant Message. This
launches an MS Office Communicator conversation window with the selected contact(s).
Multiple contacts are not supported with Office Communicator 2005.
Send Email to a Contact
Right click a contact in the Contacts window and click Send Email. A new email message
for the selected contact is composed.
A submenu provides the following options:

No attachmentscreates a blank email.

Display Screen Captureattaches a screen capture of the active display. Any changes
made to the display while it has been open are included in the screen capture; you do not
need to save the file first.

Note: You must have Microsoft Outlook XP or greater installed on your machine to send
email to a contact.

Sort Contacts
Right click a contact in the Contacts window and click Sort. A submenu provides the
following options:

Alphabetically

By Availabilitysorts contacts by contacts' presence (page 190). Selected by default.

View Contact Information


Right click a contact in the Contacts window and click View Contact Card. The Office
Communicator Contact Card window appears where you can view contacts from MS
Office Communicator.

Contacts Presence
The FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Historian Notifications add-in allows you to view
personalized presence attributes from Office Communicator while working in FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook.
For more information on presence, see the Microsoft Office Online Help.

190

Chapter 9

Embedding and Linking


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook provides the capability to use Microsoft's OLE linking
and embedding technology. You can embed or link OLE objects from other Windows
applications into a ProcessBook display. The data might be derived from a wide variety of
OLE-compliant applications, such as spreadsheets, documents, and graphics.

Overview of Microsoft OLE Compound Documents


ActiveX is Microsoft technology used for developing reusable object oriented software
components. Container applications are those that can contain ActiveX objects.
Compound Documents are documents that contain parts from more than one application. The
parts may be spreadsheets, word processing documents, ProcessBook displays, etc. A
compound document consists of a container document plus sub-documents that are 'served'
by other applications.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook compound document functionality has two aspects:

ProcessBook displays can be containers for objects from other applications, such as
databases, spreadsheets, or documents.

ProcessBook displays may be used to exhibit dynamic data within other container
applications. In this case, the ProcessBook or display is considered an object.

OLE Automation in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook


OLE Automation of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook means that an application or
program outside FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook can manipulate FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook objects such as displays or symbols. Currently, applications with OLE
capability include Microsoft Excel, Access, and Visual Basic (VB), among others. A specific
set of properties and methods are associated with each object type.
Data from FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook can be retrieved or manipulated according to
scripts originating outside FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. For example, with the proper
scripts in place, you could:

Obtain a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook object, such as a display, from FactoryTalk


Historian ProcessBook and print it in an Excel spreadsheet. In fact, you can write the
script to retrieve the display only when certain tag values or other conditions are met.

Write a Visual Basic program to start FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, assess a


particular display, and then alter it in some way.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

191

Embedding and Linking

Click a button in ProcessBook to make an Excel spreadsheet show the average and raw
data of the current trend in ProcessBook. Then you could change the time range of the
ProcessBook, click the button again, and see the Excel spreadsheet update with the new
time range.

Although Automation scripts are not required to use a dialect of Visual Basic, at the present
time, that is the most common approach. Rockwell Automation is using Visual Basic as the
standard testing language for OLE Automation.
For more information on how to write Visual Basic scripts for use with FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook, click Help > PI Processbook VBA Language Reference.

Embedded Objects
Embedded objects are copied from an existing file or created and then stored as an integral
part of the container application, such as FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. Using an
embedded object increases the file size of a ProcessBook significantly.
Formats not natively supported by FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, such as Windows
metafiles, can be pasted from the Windows clipboard as objects in a ProcessBook display.
When you paste an object into a display it becomes embedded.
To change the contents of an embedded file, double-click it. The source application software
is invoked, and you can edit the object with the source application's commands.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is a time-based application. When a ProcessBook is used
as an embedded object, it updates dynamically whenever you double-click it.
If you rename a ProcessBook or move it to another directory, drive, or PC, you can still
change any embedded objects in displays as long as your system can locate the appropriate
source application software.

Embed in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook


Objects may be created within a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Display by the source
application and then stored as embedded objects. Alternatively, you may create objects from
existing files or parts of files. In addition, you can embed an object by dragging or pasting it
from another application.
You must be in Build mode in order to insert a new object. Click Insert > Object to launch
the Insert Object dialog box.

192

Embedded Objects

Embed an Existing File in a Display


Note: You can also embed images by using FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook's
graphic symbol (page 123). The graphic symbol is a built-in symbol that is
specifically designed to display images, and therefore may offer you more control
then embedding an OLE object.

1. Open the display.


2. In Build mode, click Insert > Object. The Insert Object dialog box appears.
3. Select Create from File.
4. Click the Browse button. The Browse dialog box appears.
5. Browse and locate the file you want to embed and then click the Open button.
The file name is displayed in the File box, or
In the File box, type the path where the file is located.
6. If you want to display an icon rather than a graphic, click the Display as Icon check box.
7. Click OK. The object appears on your display.
Embed a New File in a Display
1. Open the display.
2. In Build mode, click Insert > Object. The Insert Object dialog box appears.
3. Leave Create New selected (the default position).
4. Under Object Type, click the type of object you want to embed.
Note: If you want to display an icon rather than a graphic, select the Display as Icon
check box.

5. Click OK. The object appears on your display.


FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

193

Embedding and Linking

6. Adjust the size and positioning of the object.


7. Commands for the source application are available on the menus. Create the contents of
the new object and click elsewhere on the display to return to ProcessBook.
8. Save the display.

Edit the Contents of an Embedded Object


You cannot edit an embedded object by opening the source application first because the
embedded object is not a separate file. Instead, open the source application from within the
embedded object in the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Display.

Share ProcessBook Displays with Other Applications


You can embed a display within another OLE application, or you can link an entire
ProcessBook. In embedding, the display is called a Display Document. Although applications
with OLE functionality use similar commands, they are not exactly alike. The following
general procedure uses examples from an Excel spreadsheet.
Embed an Existing Display in Another OLE Application
1. Open the display you want to embed.
2. Open the container application. For example, open a spreadsheet and select a cell in
which you want to place a ProcessBook display.
3. In Build mode, click Edit > Select All, and drag the objects in the display into the other
application.
4. Save the file.
Note: When you activate the dragged contents, the entire original display is drawn,
regardless of which objects were dragged to the new container.

Embed a New Display in Another OLE Application


1. Open the container application. For example, open a spreadsheet and select a cell in
which you want to place a display.
2. Click Insert > Object. The Object dialog box appears.
3. On the Create New tab, under Object type, click Display Document.
Note: If you want to display an icon rather than a graphic, select the Display as icon
check box.

4. Click OK.
5. The display is embedded in the container application.
194

Linked Objects

Linked Objects
Linked object information is not stored as a part of the destination application. Instead, the
destination file stores only the location of the linked source file. No matter how many links it
has, only one version of the linked file is stored and maintained. Using a linked file increases
the file size of a ProcessBook less than using an embedded object.
In establishing an OLE link, you may update the:

Contents of the object dynamically whenever the source file changes

Update the object only by manual command

To change the data in a linked file, such as which tags you have selected, you switch to the
source application and open the file. Changes are then reflected in the container display
according to the update method you selected.
Alternatively, if you double-click the object, the source application and the actual file open,
allowing you to edit the object. If the source application supports in-place activation, you can
edit within the container window; otherwise a source application window opens.
If you rename a ProcessBook or move it to another directory, drive, or PC, any links from
displays to source files can break. These broken links need to be re-established if you wish to
continue using them.

Link a File to a Display


You can create a link from a ProcessBook display to an existing file. The linked object
appears in a rectangle within your display. It is updated whenever the source file changes,
unless you change the link setting from Automatic to Manual.
You must be in Build mode to insert a linked object, however you may move or resize linked
objects in either Build or Run mode. You may also edit the contents of a linked object, but
you are actually editing the original source file, not simply the image in the ProcessBook
display.
1. Open the display.
2. In Build mode, click Insert > Object. The Insert Object dialog box appears.
3. Select Create from File.
4. Click the Browse button. The Browse dialog box appears.
5. Browse and locate the file you want to embed and then click the Open button.
The file name appears in the File box, or
In the File box, type the path where the file is located.
Note: If you want to display an icon rather than a graphic, select the Display as Icon
check box.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

195

Embedding and Linking

6. Select the Link check box.


7. Click OK. The object appears on your display.
8. Adjust the size and positioning of the object.

Dynamic and Manual Updates of a Linked Object


The default setting for a link is automatic updates, meaning that whenever the source data
are changed, the data in your display changes.
You can change this updating frequency to manual through the Links dialog box. Manual
updates are also initiated through this dialog box.

Edit, Update, or Break Links


If you have created an automatic link to another object, it updates whenever you open the
entry. If you have created a manually updated link, use the Update Now button on the Links
dialog box to update your linked object.
When you move a display, you may need to change the sources for linked objects by breaking
the links and re-establishing them.
1. Open the display.
2. In Build mode, click Edit > Links. The Links dialog box appears.
3. Click the link you want to change.
Note: You can select several links at once by pressing the CTRL key and clicking
each link.

4. Choose one of the following options:

Select ManualUpdates the linked data manually


Click Update NowUpdates the linked data immediately
Click Open SourceEdits the linked data
Click Break LinkPermanently breaks the link. The object is converted to a picture
(metafile).

5. Click OK.

How Links Are Stored


When you establish a link between a ProcessBook display and a source file, the link is stored
in two ways, the relative path for the link, and the absolute path for the link. The relative path
is the relationship between the location of the source file and the location of the target file in
the directory tree. The absolute path includes the drive, directory, and file name of the source
file.

196

Linked Objects

Select a New Source Link


When you move a ProcessBook or display that contains links to source files, if both the
absolute and the relative paths change, you need to reestablish the links.
To reestablish these links:
1. Open the display.
2. In Build mode, click Edit > Links. The Links dialog box appears.
3. Click the Change Source button. The Change Source dialog box appears.

Edit the Contents of a Linked Object


To edit the contents of a linked object, either double-click the object or open the source
application and make changes. These are immediately reflected in the ProcessBook display if
it is open; otherwise the changes appear the next time you open the ProcessBook display.
Note: When editing a linked object file, remember that the file may also be an object in
other applications besides FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.

In addition, you can reach the source application through the Links dialog box.
1. Click Edit > Links. The Links dialog box appears.
2. Click the appropriate link.
3. Click the Open Source button to open the source file.

Link a ProcessBook to Another Application


1. Open the container application. For example, open a spreadsheet and select a cell in
which you want to place a display.
2. Click Insert > Object. The Object dialog box appears.
3. Click the Create from File tab.
4. In the File name box, type the path.
-orClick the Browse button and locate the ProcessBook file (.piw) that you want to link to.
5. Select the Link to File check box.
6. Click OK. The ProcessBook icon is displayed in your application.
Note: If you select the Display as Icon check box, then the Object Packager icon is
used by default, rather than the ProcessBook icon.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

197

Embedding and Linking

Should You Link or Embed?

EmbedIf you want to update the object data within the target document or if you want
to store all the source data within the container application. This option is also better if
you plan to link files to different locations.

LinkIf you want the data to update dynamically or when you need to minimize file
size. The source application and linked files must continue to be available.

Note: When you link to a ProcessBook container, there is a risk of accidentally changing
the source file.

Example of Embedded and Linked Objects in a ProcessBook Display


In the example below, a ProcessBook display includes a process schematic, an embedded list
of equipment parts, and a link to lab results.

The equipment parts list is stored with the ProcessBook display. If your PC has an installed
copy of MSWord, you can peruse or modify the list at any time simply by double-clicking it.
The lab results are stored by the source application, not in the ProcessBook display. The
display can be set to update lab data dynamically whenever the results in the source
application changed, or it can be set to update lab data when you click an Update Now button
on the Edit Links dialog box.

Add an Active X Control


You can insert ActiveX controls that are installed on your PC into FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook Displays. If you move the displays to other machines, then you must also install
the controls there.

198

Work with OLE Objects

Some ActiveX controls are self-contained and will work without further scripting. Most
require additional VBA code before they function correctly.
1. In Build mode, open a display.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click the Control button

, or

Click Draw > Control.


The mouse pointer changes to a control pointer.
3. Click in the display where you want to add the control and drag the pointer to form a
rectangle into which the control will be placed.
When you release the mouse button, the Insert Control dialog box appears.
4. Under Controls, click the appropriate control, and then click OK. For example, if you
add a calendar control to a display, it might look like this:

In Run mode, a user could change the month and date. A programmer could incorporate
the calendar into scripts associated with the display.

Work with OLE Objects


Icons vs. Graphics
You may choose to have embedded or linked objects displayed either as graphic
representations or as icons. An icon uses the minimum area of your display and would be
appropriate for reference material, such as definitions.
The icon for the source application appears unless you select another one.
Choosing an icon to represent a linked file results in a slightly smaller ProcessBook file size.
Choosing icons for embedded objects does not reduce ProcessBook file size.
Convert Objects to Icons
To save space on a ProcessBook display for a linked object use an icon, rather than a graphic
representation of the data.
You may select to display an icon when you are creating the object by selecting the Display
as Icon check box in the Insert Object dialog box. Later, you can switch between an icon

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

199

Embedding and Linking

and a graphic representation of the object, as described below. If you have made the graphic
representation other than a square shape, the icon may be distorted.
1. Open the display.
2. In Build mode, click the object you want to change.
3. Click Edit > Object (at the bottom of the menu) > Convert. The Convert dialog box
appears.

4. Select the Display As Icon check box


5. Click OK. The object switches from a graphic to an icon.
Note: To switch from an icon to a graphic, clear the Display as Icon check box.

6. To select the icon to use, click the Change Icon button. The Change Icon dialog box
appears.

200

If you want to return to the default icon, then select Default.


If you want to select a new icon from the available group, select From File and
choose a new icon.
If you want to select a new file to provide the icon, click the Browse button.

Work with OLE Objects

If you want to change the name of the label that displays beneath the icon, then type
the new name in the Label box.

7. Click OK to return to the Convert dialog box.


8. In the Convert dialog box, click OK.

Windows Drag and Drop


Use the Windows drag and drop feature to move or copy an object from another OLE
application or display into a ProcessBook display or vice versa. To move an object, simply
drag it. To copy an object, press CTRL and drag it. FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook must
be in Build mode to successfully have an object dragged or dropped.
Note: if you open a display and drag an object elsewhere, the display is permanently
changed, regardless of whether you save it or simply close it.

Edit the Appearance of an OLE Object


Once an OLE object appears in a display, you can resize it, move it around on the display, or
copy it. There are, however, a few differences in how OLE objects respond to FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook commands, compared to native objects such as symbols.
Although you must be in Build mode to insert an OLE object or edit links, you can edit OLE
objects from either Run mode or Build mode. When you select an OLE object, switching
modes does not cancel the selection.
Note: It is not possible to disable the ability to move, resize, edit, or copy an OLE object.
This behavior is built into the underlying Microsoft OLE technology, and not
governed by FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.

Commands That Ignore OLE objects


Command

Location

Action

Select All

Edit menu

Does not include OLE objects.

Zoom/Fit All
Symbols

View menu

Ignores OLE objects.

Align

Arrange menu

Does not work because you cannot select more than one
OLE object at a time.

Forward

Arrange menu

Does not work because you cannot select more than one
OLE object at a time.

Backward

Arrange menu

Does not work because you cannot select more than one
OLE object at a time.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

201

Embedding and Linking

Command

Location

Action

Group

Arrange menu

Does not work because you cannot select more than one
OLE object at a time.

Rotate

Arrange menu

Does not work with OLE objects.

Flip

Arrange menu

Does not work with OLE objects.

Placement of OLE objects


OLE objects appear to obscure other elements of the display, such as text or symbols, if the
OLE objects were created before the native symbols. The most recently created OLE object
appears on top of older OLE objects and native symbols.
Active X controls and OLE objects are not really part of a display, but rather sit on top of it.
They therefore do not participate in the regular Z-order of display items. This fact also limits
the ability to use the Tab key to select OLE objects in a display.

OLE Object Colors


You may wish to use a background within an OLE object in a contrasting color to the display.
To change the colors used in an OLE object, go to the source application. ProcessBook Color
Preferences do not apply to OLE objects.

Edit Contents of OLE objects


Some source applications permit in-place activation, which means that if you double-click the
OLE object, the source application opens, displays its menus and commands through the
ProcessBook menu bar, and permits you to edit the object in place within FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook. Other source applications open a new window for editing when you
double-click the OLE object.
1. Open the display.
2. In Build mode, double-click the OLE object you want to edit.
3. Refer to the following table:

202

If

Then

The source application permits in-place activation,


menus and commands for the source application
appear on your screen, temporarily replacing
ProcessBook menus.

Edit the object.


Save it if it is a linked file.
Click elsewhere on the display to return to
ProcessBook or press the ESC key.

The source application does not permit in-place


activation, a new window containing the source
application appears.

Edit the object.


Save it if it is a linked file.
Close the window and return to ProcessBook.

Work with OLE Objects

Delete an OLE Object from a Display


1. In Build mode, click the OLE object you want to delete.
2. Click Edit > Clear.

OLE Container/Server
A ProcessBook display may be shown in another application. For example, you could include
an updating trend in an incident report produced in a word processing application such as
Microsoft Word. Or, you could prepare a presentation for a group by using Microsoft
PowerPoint to prepare slides and including embedded displays from FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook. To do this, use the Insert Object command in the second application and insert
an object of type Display Document.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

203

Appendix A

Visual Basic for Applications in FactoryTalk


Historian ProcessBook
Rockwell Automation licenses Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) from Microsoft in order
to provide an integrated development environment. This is the same VBA that is used in
Microsoft Office, Visio, AutoCAD, Great Plains Dynamics, and many other applications.
In FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, each display has a VBA project associated with it.
You can write scripts that execute in response to events in FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook, either from user actions or data updates. Also use VBA to automate routine
tasks or to cause changes in a display when data changes.
The Visual Basic toolbar includes three command buttons (page 205): Visual Basic Editor,
Run Macro, and Design Mode.
Use of VBA in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is documented in the VBA language
reference. Click Help > PI ProcessBook VBA Language Reference to open this reference
guide.

VBA Commands
Access VBA through the VBA toolbar, or by clicking Tools > Macro:
Visual Basic Editor

Switches to VBA Editor window

Run Macros

Opens the Macros dialog box, which provides a way to


select, debug, and run existing VBA scripts

Design Mode

Stops any scripts that may be running or may start running.


Useful for debugging

ActiveX Automation
ActiveX Automation refers to the technology of placing ActiveX controls (independent
software modules) within applications and using scripts to manipulate the application and/or
the controls.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

205

Visual Basic for Applications in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook

What You Can Do with ActiveX Automation in FactoryTalk


Historian ProcessBook
Data from FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook can be retrieved or manipulated according to
scripts originating either within or outside FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. For example,
with the proper scripts in place, you could:

Obtain a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook object, such as a display, from FactoryTalk


Historian ProcessBook and print it in an Excel spreadsheet. In fact, you can write the
script to retrieve the display if and only if certain tag values or other conditions are met.

Write a VB program to start FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, access a particular


display, and then alter it in some way.

Click on a command button in ProcessBook to make an Excel spreadsheet show the


average and raw data of the current trend in ProcessBook. Then you change the time
range of the ProcessBook, click the button again, and see the Excel spreadsheet update
with the new time range.

Use a mouse click within a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Display to initiate


updates or adjustments in the display.

Update a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Display by typing new tag names into a
spreadsheet.

Although Automation scripts are not required to use a dialect of Visual Basic, at the present
time, that is the most common approach.

Automation Vocabulary
Understanding OLE automation requires some technical vocabulary. Terms used in the
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook VBA Language Reference Guide are defined below.

206

Automation

Accessing an object in an application and changing it or using it without using the


user interface.

ActiveX
Automation
Server

The application that provides data. FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is an OLE


Automation Server. It provides access to its internal objects from other
applications.

ActiveX
Automation
Container

The application that initiates changes through scripts. FactoryTalk Historian


ProcessBook is an Automation container, as are Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Access,
and a few other commercial products.

Object

A specific item that may be manipulated by a script. For example, a ProcessBook,


a display, or a symbol may be the object of a VB or VBA script.

Property

An attribute of an object. An object with read-write properties can have variable


information assigned to it by the script. A read-only property cannot be changed.

Method

An action that can be performed on an object and may or may not return a value.
Sometimes called a function.

Event

A procedure that executes whenever a particular action occurs, such as a mouse


click.

Appendix B

System Administrator Notes


Installation and Upgrade
For up-to-date installation and upgrade instructions, refer to FactoryTalk Historian DataLink
Release Notes.

System Requirements
For up-to-date system requirements, refer to FactoryTalk Historian DataLink Release Notes.

Compatibility with Other FactoryTalk Historian System Client Products

If you have other client products, such as FactoryTalk Historian DataLink, the same root
path is used for installation, often C:\Program Files\Rockwell
Software\FactoryTalk Historian\PIPC. Otherwise, incompatibilities in the
.dll files shared by the applications could occur.

If you have FactoryTalk Historian BatchView installed on your system, Setup installs a
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Batch group symbol that is compatible with the
current version of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. You can also install FactoryTalk
Historian BatchView after installing FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, and the correct
Batch Trend symbol is loaded.

Historian SQC is installed with FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook.

High Availability Configuration Settings


On workstations where FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is used to write data or access
data that is not available on secondary members of a collective, a configuration setting has
been provided that modifies the default connection preference.
By editing the procbook.ini file you can configure the preference for a particular
collective. Entries of the form <collective name>=<preference> in the
[COLLECTIVE PREFERENCE] section of the procbook.ini file control how
ProcessBook establishes a connection to a server in a particular collective. The value
represented above by <collective name> represents the name listed for the collective in

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

207

System Administrator Notes

the Connection Manager. The value represented above by <preference> must be one of
the following values:

PreferPrimarythe primary server in the collective is preferred but not required

RequirePrimarythe primary server is required

Anyany server in the collective is acceptable

Note: For FactoryTalk Historian ActiveView, connection preferences are configured in


acview.ini.

In general, if the advanced feature requires a primary server to operate correctly, specifying
PreferPrimary connects you to the primary member whenever it is available. When the
primary is unavailable, a secondary server is used and all features of ProcessBook that don't
require the primary server continue to function. If the use of ProcessBook on a workstation
requires access to the primary, then specifying RequirePrimary forces the application to only
connect to a primary member and fail when such a connection cannot be completed.

Recommended Connection Preference Setting


Most ProcessBook displays do not write data to the Historian Server and therefore work
equally well against primary and secondary member servers. A setting of Any is sufficient
and supports the static load balancing configured in the PI SDK.
A setting of PreferPrimary also works well but does not allow the workstation to participate
in load balancing when running ProcessBook.
If you use RequirePrimary, and the primary is unavailable, the application behaves as it did
without High Availability when the server is unreachable. When this occurs during the
opening of a display, the error returned by the connection attempt is displayed in the Status
Report dialog box for each tag on the server. Typically, the message reads:
The requested server in not currently available. Primary.

Dynamic symbols on the display are presented in the same manner as any other symbol
attached to a disconnected server, though there is no recovery unless the primary server
comes back online.

208

MDB to AF Migration

Status Report Dialog box

If this occurs after the display is already open, ProcessBook detects the loss of connection, as
described previously, and tries to reconnect to the server. This call fails, generates the same
error as in the previous case (The requested server in not currently
available, Primary), and updates the Status Report dialog box.

MDB to AF Migration
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.3.2.229 converts Module Relative Displays (MRD)
created with earlier versions of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook into displays that are
compatible with AF.
The first time you open an MRD display in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.3.2.229, it
is automatically upgraded to an Element Relative Display (ERD) in memory. If you save the
display, you cannot revert the display to an MRD.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook does not migrate data from the Module Database (MDB).
The data migration is a separate process that occurs when you upgrade to FactoryTalk
Historian 3.0.
We recommend that you:

Upgrade to FactoryTalk Historian 3.0, which automatically converts your MDB data to
AF

Back up all of your displays before upgrading to FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook


3.3.2.229

Allow FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.3.2.229 to automatically upgrade MRD


displays to use the ERD instead

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

209

System Administrator Notes

Module Relative Display Add-in


The Module Relative Display Add-in, included in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook v3.2
and earlier, allows you to show data from a Module Database module on dynamic symbols in
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. This feature does not support AF data and is
discontinued in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.3.2.229.
Installing FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.3.2.229 uninstalls MRD add-in. You must
use an earlier release of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook or download and install the
MRD add-in from the Technical Support Web site to view the following:

MDB data from earlier versions of Historian Server

Batch displays

MRD displays

Considerations for Multiple-Versions of Historian Server or FactoryTalk


Historian ProcessBook
You must take special precautions when your FactoryTalk Historian System includes more
than one version of Historian Server or more than one version of FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook. Consider that:

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.3.2.229 does not automatically support MRD


displays.

You must download and install the MRD add-in to access data in MRD displays from
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.3.2.229 even if you have earlier versions of the
Historian Server.

When you attempt to open an MRD display that references an older server with
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.3.2.229, you get an upgrade error and no data is
displayed.

You can use FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.2 or earlier to view MRD displays
from earlier versions of Historian Server and FactoryTalk Historian 3.0. FactoryTalk
Historian 3.0 has a synchronization feature that allows you to view data with MDB-based
tools.

After you upgrade a FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Display from MRD to ERD, the
display will only show data in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.2 or later.

Matrix of Display Behavior


The following table describes what happens with MRD displays and ERD displays depending
on the version of FactoryTalk Historian System and the version of FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook.
FactoryTalk Historian 3.0 or later

210

Pre FactoryTalk Historian 3.0

MDB to AF Migration

FactoryTalk Historian 3.0 or later

Pre FactoryTalk Historian 3.0

FactoryTalk
Historian
ProcessBook
3.3.2.229

The first time you open an MRD display


in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
3.3.2.229 the ERD add-in attempts to
upgrade it.
Symbols on converted displays receive
data from AF.

Attempt to open MRD fails with


Element Not Found or Attribute
Not Found error messages.

FactoryTalk
Historian
ProcessBook
3.3.2.229 +
previously
installed MRD
add-in

Installing FactoryTalk Historian


ProcessBook 3.3.2.229 uninstalls MRD
add-in.

Installing FactoryTalk Historian


ProcessBook 3.3.2.229 uninstalls MRD
add-in.

FactoryTalk
Historian
ProcessBook
3.2

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.2


supports both MRD and ERD.
You must manually uninstall the MRD
Add-in from the computer to migrate
exiting MRD displays to ERD.
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.2
supports both MRD and ERD.

You can continue to open MRD


displays.

PreFactoryTalk
Historian
ProcessBook
3.2

ERD is not available.


FactoryTalk Historian 3.0 supports MRD
though a two-way synchronization that
makes AF elements available as
Modules.
This is not the recommended path
forward. We recommend that you
upgrade to AF.

You can continue to open MRD


displays.

Migrate a Module Relative Display (MRD) to an Element Relative Display


(ERD)
When an MRD is opened in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook 3.2 or higher, the ERD addin attempts to map the stored MDB paths to the new paths in AF created by migration to a
FactoryTalk Historian 3.0 or later. Any errors are reported in the Migration Status window.
After this upgrade, if you have saved the display, it is no longer compatible with earlier
versions of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, which do not have ERD.
Follow these steps to migrate your Module Relative Displays to Element Relative Displays:
1. In FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook, open an MRD display. The display is shown and
the migration process occurs at the point where the display would normally retrieve data.
Once the migration process is complete, the ERD docking window appears with a status
icon in the title bar notifying you whether or not the migration completed successfully.
The display successfully migrated.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

211

System Administrator Notes

The display successfully migrated, but there were some issues.


The display was not migrated and will not work.
Note: In the case of a partially successful migration, the symbols and/or contexts
that could not be migrated are left the way they were. If you save your display
and then reopen it, the migration is reattempted.
Following a successful migration you may see a dynamic symbol display No Data.
This occurs when the Module database is migrated to an AF database, but the
element corresponding to the module cannot be found on the AF database.

2. Click the icon to display the Migration Results dialog box.

3. (Optional) Click the Save to File button to save the results as a tab-delineated file that
can be exported into a spreadsheet such as Microsoft Excel. This file contains additional
migration information.

Playback Toolbar Setting Defaults


The values for Scroll Period, Display Range, and Speed default to the settings they had when
you closed FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. Default settings do not change from display
to display.
Start time, end time, and display range values default based on the user and locale. This
avoids issues when a user enters a locale dependent dynamic time string such as *-8 stunde
that would only be recognized by the FactoryTalk Historian System when running under the
same locale. Units for speed in the Playback Options window are localized for region.

212

DEP Security

DEP Security
Data Execution Prevention (DEP) is a setting introduced with Windows XP SP2 and is
available in subsequent Windows operating systems. The setting prevents malicious code
attacks. FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook works correctly when this setting is enabled.

Read/Write Data Access for Users


Although most data features in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook require read-only access
(writing annotations (page 129) from the Details add-in being one notable exception), the
FactoryTalk Historian System Administrator can configure a user's setup for read-only,
read/write, or no access. For more information, refer to PIBuild:PIServer.txt on your
Historian Server node.
If you want to restrict read and/or write access to FactoryTalk Historian data, make changes
in the CLIENTACCESS section of the file pisysdat:piserver.dat. For example:
[USERDATABASE]
DEFAULT=Historian
[CLIENTACCESS]
DEFAULT=RW
DYAN=R
ERIC=R
JOHN=NONE

The above entries in piserver.dat result in:

The machines named DYAN and ERIC have only read access to FactoryTalk Historian
data.

The machine named JOHN does not have any access to FactoryTalk Historian data.

All other machines have both read and write access to Historian.

The value for the DEFAULT entry is initially set to RW. Otherwise, existing PINet nodes will
not function properly.
If you want to restrict write access from PCs, set the default CLIENTACCESS to R and add
entries to accommodate your PINet Nodes. For example:
[USERDATABASE]
DEFAULT=Historian
[CLIENTACCESS]
DEFAULT=R
BRIAN=RW

The preceding entry allows the PINet node BRIAN to read and to write data to the
FactoryTalk Historian System. All other nodes have read- only access.
TCP/IP node names are case-sensitive. In addition, the values for the entries in the
CLIENTACCESS section (for example, R and W) are also case-sensitive.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

213

System Administrator Notes

Machine Address
Because FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is a client/server application, the communication
setup is essential. The machine address, which allows the FactoryTalk Historian System to
recognize your machine, is a key item. Often, the address may be found as an alias in the TCP
host file. The Network Administrator should resolve any questions or difficulties regarding
the network and addressing.

PROCBOOK.INI
The PROCBOOK.INI file contains configuration and preference settings for FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook. This file generally resides in two places, the user's default location,
C:\Documents and Settings\<user name>\Application
Data\PISystem\PI-ProcessBook\<language>, and the
PIPC\DAT\<language> directory (on the local drive where FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook is installed).
When FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is installed on an individual PC using
SETUP.EXE, the procbook.ini file in PIPC\DAT\en is created (for the base, English
installation). The file in C:\Documents and Settings\<user
name>\Application Data\PISystem\PI-ProcessBook\<language> is only
created once settings are changed in the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook Preferences
dialog box for the first time. The values in C:\Documents and Settings\<user
name>\Application Data\PISystem\PI-ProcessBook\language override
the values in PIPC\DAT\<language> unless an administrator creates Registry entries to
override user-specific settings.
The following is a list and brief explanation of the most significant sections and keywords in
the PROCBOOK.INI file. The settings used are examples and not necessarily the default
values.

Startup Section
Initializations for startup of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
Possible entries:
StartupProcessBookSpecifies file (with full path) to be opened on start of the application.
May be blank.
DefaultFileLocationBy default, clicking File > Open displays the local user's My
Documents directory. Specifying a different directory in this entry changes the File > Open
and File > Save commands to start with a different folder when ProcessBook starts.
ModeBiasR=run-mode, B=build-mode
RetainAspectRatio1=preserve aspect ratio for displays, 0=do not
Symbol LibrarySpecifies a workbook that is opened by selecting the Book of Symbols
button from a customized toolbar.

214

PROCBOOK.INI

MakeBackupFile1=make backup files while using ProcessBook, 0=do not make backup
files
AuthorSets the default author for created displays and workbooks
ToolTipsEnabledSetting this entry equal to Y enables ToolTips on dynamic symbols.
Setting equal to N disables them. The default (if this entry is not in the .ini file) is Y. This
setting has no effect on toolbar ToolTips.
International Date FormatSpecifies date/time format. 1=Windows format, 0=Historian
Time format
PromptForConversion1=prompt user when opening a file created with an earlier version,
asking whether or not to convert to new format, 0=do not prompt (default)
MaxUndoStackSizeMaximum number of elements in the Undo stack (default is 200)
Build/Run Scroll ModeFor each mode, set the scrolling: 0=off, 1=on, 2=automatic.
GridSizeSets the Grid Size, in lines per screen unit. Default is 12.
File Access EntriesFileAccessTimeout and FileAccessInterval entries,
described below, the common INI file (in \PIPC\Dat) is checked first for these settings as
opposed to the private INI files.
FileAccessTimeoutNumber of seconds FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook attempts
to open a locked file (default is 5 seconds)
FileAccessIntervalNumber of intervals, in tenths of seconds, between attempts to
open a locked file (default is 1/10 of a second)
COMTimeOutThis is the number of seconds that the ProcessBook container waits before
showing a timeout dialog box. The default is 30 seconds.
RunSelectorColorRed, Green, Blue, values can range from 0 to 255, sets the color of the
selector rectangle in run mode.
MacroProtectionLevelSpecifies how ProcessBook handles macros per display. Possible
settings:
Level 0No macro protection (default if entry is not defined)
Level 1Prompts user to disable macros when VBA code is opened
Level 2Prompts user as in Level 1, except when macros are disabled, VBA code is
opened and locked in design mode
Level 5Same as Level 1, except no dialog box appears when display is opened (can
toggle between run and design modes)
Level 6Same as Level 2, except no dialog box appears when display is opened (locked
in design mode)
Toolbar Configuration EntriesTypically the toolbar INI file
(PBToolbarConfig.ini) is generated by ProcessBook in the same folder as the private
PROCBOOK.INI file, and is persisted there. However, you can assign toolbar configurations
to other INI files by setting the entries below (in order of precedence, from first to last):

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

215

System Administrator Notes

TBFilePathLocation and filename that the user's toolbar configuration data will be
persisted (this file must have both read and write access). This will also be the first
location looked for when loading the toolbar configuration.
UserDefaultTBRead-only location and filename of a toolbar configuration that is
searched for, when the file in TBFilePath is not found. This could be a default
company, or group, configuration.
PBDefaultTBRead-only location and filename of a toolbar configuration, used only
when the two entries above are not found, and there is no toolbar configuration data
persisted in the Windows registry.
ReferencesFilenames or paths to VBA references, separated by semicolons (;)
URL HomeSpecifies the website navigated to when a user clicks the ProcessBook icon in
the Help\About box. Default link is to the Rockwell Automation Website
(http://www.rockwellautomation.com//)
MaxBitmapMBMaximum file size (in megabytes) that bitmap images may be loaded in
displays. If embedded bitmaps are larger than the specified maximum, ProcessBook scales
the images down to lower resolutions. The current default maximum is 16.0 MB.
ServerTimeZone1=Show times and time spans based on the time zone of the server where
the tags originate, 0=Show times and time spans based on the time zone of the local machine.
1 is the default.
ProcessBookSetting this value equal to PRIMARY allows users to view ProcessBooks,
but not change them. The user has access to the Standard toolbar, including the trend
displays command to create instant trends, but cannot save an instant display.
EnableScreenSaverIndicates whether the platform's screen saver should be displayed
while ProcessBook is running. A value of 1 enables the screen saver and is appears if it is
defined at the operating system level. A value of 0 prevents the screen saver from appearing
while ProcessBook is running, even if the screen saver is enabled at the operating system
level. The default value is 1. If this entry is not in procbook.ini, the application assumes a
value of 1.
ConnectUsingAPI0 = (default) do not connect on startup using the PI API, only use the PI
SDK. 1 = connect using the PI API (and the PI SDK). This setting is used to support legacy
VBA code in displays/add-ins.
Show Value AttributesIndicates whether value attribute flags (substituted, questionable,
annotations) are shown for tags.
1 = Yes (default setting)
0 = No
PB2TraceCompatibilityIndicates whether all snapshot values are retained for trend traces
or discarded when a new archive event is received on updating trends.
1 = Yes. Do not replace snapshot values when a new archive event is received. This
setting may result in a jagged trace that gets smoothed when the trend is reverted.
0 = No. Use snapshot value filtering/removal logic so that only archive values and any
snapshot values since the last archive event are shown on the trend.

216

PROCBOOK.INI

EnableConnectorAttachmentscontrols whether symbols drag and dropped on top of a


connector are made into connector attachments
1 = true - allow
0 = false - do not allow
ConnectorsAvoidConnectorscontrols whether connectors are treated as obstacles to be
avoided when performing object avoidance
1 = true - connectors are avoided in object avoidance
0 = false - connectors are not avoided in object avoidance
AutoEnableScriptingwhen set to True, new dynamic symbols are automatically enabled
for scripting. If set to False, new dynamic symbols are not automatically enabled for
scripting. The False setting may improve performance for very complex displays with many
symbols.
Startup Example
[Startup]
Startup ProcessBook=PIDEMO.PIW
DefaultFileLocation="C:\Program Files\Rockwell
Software\FactoryTalk Historian\PIPC\Procbook"
ModeBias=R
Retain Aspect Ratio=0
Symbol Library=SYMLIBRY.PIW
PromptForConversion=[PB_PROMPTFORCONVERSION]
Show Value Attributes=1
PB2TraceCompatibility=0
MakeBackupFile=0
ToolTipsEnabled=Y
Author=
International Date Format=1
MaxUndoStackSize=20
Build Scroll Mode=1
Run Scroll Mode=1
GridSize=12
FileAccessTimeout=5
FileAccessInterval=1
COMTimeOut=30
RunSelectorColor=0,0,0
MacroProtectionLevel=0
TBFilePath=
UserDefaultTB=
PBDefaultTB=
References=
URL Home="http://www.rockwellautomation.com/"
MaxBitmapMB=16
ServerTimeZone=1
Processbook=PRIMARY
EnableScreenSaver=1
ConnectUsingAPI=0
EnableConnectorAttachments=1

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

217

System Administrator Notes

ProcessBook View Section


The ProcessBook View section of the .INI file should be modified through the Tools >
Preferences dialog box and should resemble this example:
[ProcessBook View]
BookView = 1

BookView controls the view in which a ProcessBook is displayed when opened (0 =


Outline, 1 = Book).
To change the font for the tabs in book view, add a section similar to this example:
[BookTab_Font]
Height=-13
Weight=0
Italic=0
Underline=0
PitchAndFamily=0
FaceName=Arial

The FaceName should be a True-Type font so that it can be rotated.

Conversion Section
The Conversion section of the .INI file identifies resources for importing other file formats
and resembles this example:
[Conversion]
Import0 = PIDisDIFF Files, impd32.dll, dat
Import1 = Historian-Graphics Files, impp32.dll, dat

ImportN identifies the file types used when converting VAX-formatted trends or graphics.
N increments by one for each file type.
The second field is the name of the file type to be imported and will appear in the List Files
of Type drop-down box in the Import File dialog box.
The third field is the DLL used to import the file type. No path is necessary, since the files
reside in the same directory as Procbook.exe.
The fourth field is the default extension for the file type. You may have more than one
extension for each import type, separated by semicolons.

Data Manager Section


The Data Manager section of the .INI file should be added by the System Manager and
should resemble this example.
[Data Manager]
TIMER = 5000

TIMER sets the poll timer, in milliseconds, for checking whether FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook should perform any time-related task. Time-related tasks include retrieving

218

PROCBOOK.INI

exception reports from Historian and re-querying sources. (60,000 is the maximum setting;
the default is 5000.)

Trend Definition Section


Trend definitions control the default behavior applied to new trend symbols and instant
trends. These settings correspond to settings on the Trend and Trend Elements tabs of the
Preferences dialog box.
Autoscale1=yes, 0=no
Value/Description/Plot Title/Grids/Scale Inside Axis/Tag Name/Eng Units/Correlation
Coefficient/Linear Correlation/Connecting Lines1=enable feature, 0=disable feature
Background Null1=sets to have no background color, 0=have background color specified
under Elements
Start Time/End TimeDefault start and end time range (must be a valid Historian string)
UpdateTimeRangeMaximum time period, in seconds, to support updates. The default is
604,800 seconds, equal to 7 days. If the time range is greater than this value, the trend does
not update automatically even when the end time is '*'. Note that the maximum update range
is different from the update rate, which is the frequency with which the computer displays
new data from the server, typically every 5 seconds.
MarkerWarningProcessBook has the option of showing a warning dialog box whenever a
trend has found too many marker values to display them on the plot. 1=enables this option,
0=disables this option. Default value is 1.
RequeryThresholdFactorBase the max values for each trace on a "factor" of the interval
RequeryHoldoffTimeoutMinimum time for re-query since last requery in milliseconds
Max Tracesthe maximum number of traces per trend.
ElementThese 16 entries are the main drawn properties of trends. For each of 16 trend
elements, you can change the color and shape properties. This is the entry format:
ElementX = Name, Color, LineStyle, MarkerStyle
ColorDecimal conversion of the color to draw the element.
ex. Pen 1 has a color of 65280, this converts to 0x00ff00 in hex
-->00ff00 = 0 red, 255 green, 0 blue ==> Green
LineStyleLine style of the element. Key is as follows:
-1=no line, 0=solid, 1=dashed, 2=dotted, 3=dash-dot, 4=dash-dot-dot
MarkerStyleMarker style of each trace. Key is as follows:
-1=no marker, 0=closed circle, 1=open circle, 2=closed diamond, 3=open diamond,
4=closed square, 5=open square, 6=closed triangle, 7=open triangle, 8=cross
Tag Name/Server Name1=show on legend by default, 0=do not show on legend by
default
Example:
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

219

System Administrator Notes

[Trend Definition]
Autoscale=1
Value=1
Description=0
Markers=0
Plot Title=1
Grids=1
Scale Inside Axis=1
Tag Name=1
Server Name=0
Eng Units=1
Background Null=0
Start Time=*-8 Hour
End Time=*
MarkerWarning=1
UpdateTimeRange=604800
;MaxValues=2000
RequeryThresholdFactor=6
RequeryHoldoffTimeout=300000
Max Traces=50
Element1=Horz. Axis,0,0,-1
Element2=Background,8421504,-1,-1
Element3=Horz. Major Grid,0,0,-1
Element4=Horz. Minor Grid,0,0,-1
Element5=Pen 1,65280,0,0
Element6=Pen 2,16776960,0,1
Element7=Pen 3,65535,0,2
Element8=Pen 4,16711935,0,3
Element9=Pen 5,255,0,4
Element10=Pen 6,16777215,0,5
Element11=Pen 7,16711680,0,6
Element12=Pen 8,0,0,7
Element13=Text,16777215,-1,-1
Element14=Vert. Axis,0,0,-1
Element15=Vert. Major Grid,0,0,-1
Element16=Vert. Minor Grid,0,0,-1

Colors Section
Defines the 16 colors in the ProcessBook palette.
Parameters: ColorX = Red, Green, Blue, values can range from 0 to 255
Example:
[Colors]
Color1=255,255,255
Color2=255,0,0
Color3=0,255,0
Color4=0,0,255
Color5=0,255,255
Color6=255,0,255
Color7=255,255,0
Color8=0,0,0
Color9=192,192,192
Color10=128,0,0

220

PROCBOOK.INI

Color11=0,128,0
Color12=128,128,128
Color13=128,0,128
Color14=0,0,128
Color15=128,128,0
Color16=0,128,128

Time Range Scroll Section


Possible entries:
TimeRangeMin/TimeRangeMaxset the minimum/maximum time that can be scrolled
using the time range scroll bar (must be valid Historian Time strings)
PageScrollNonlinearitysets the factor by which clicking on and holding the mouse button
down in the page scroll area will increase the speed that the thumbwheel of the scrollbar
moves. A value of 0 indicates no acceleration.
LineScrollNonlinearitysets the factor by which clicking on and holding the mouse button
down in the line scroll area will increase the speed that the thumbwheel of the scrollbar
moves. A value of 0 indicates no acceleration.
ThumbScrollNonlinearitysets the factor by which clicking and holding the thumbwheel
of the scrollbar will increase the speed that the thumbwheel moves
Example:
[Time Range Scroll]
TimeRangeMin=*-100d
TimeRangeMax=*+10d
PageScrollNonlinearity=20
LineScrollNonlinearity=100
ThumbScrollNonlinearity=20

ProcessBook Level Section


Font settings for book levels in outline view. Possible entries:
Underline1=underline, 0=no underline
FaceNameFont for specified level
HeightHeight of the font (almost equivalent to font point size)
WeightBoldness factor of the font
Italic1=italic, 0=no italic
[PB Level 1]
Underline=0
FaceName=MS Sans Serif
Height=-16
Weight=700
Italic=0
PitchAndFamily=34
[PB Level 2]

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

221

System Administrator Notes

Underline=0
FaceName=MS Sans Serif
Height=-13
Weight=700
Italic=0
PitchAndFamily=34

Display Colors Section


These settings control the default behavior for new displays and symbols.
DisplayBackgroundColorRed, Green, Blue, values can range from 0 to 255, sets the
background color for any newly created display
SymbolFillColorRed, Green, Blue, values can range from 0 to 255, sets the fill color for
newly created symbols
SymbolLineColorRed, Green, Blue, values can range from 0 to 255, sets the line or text
color for newly created symbols
SymbolBackgroundColorRed, Green, Blue, values can range from 0 to 255, sets the
background color for newly created symbols, for example, the empty portion of a bar symbol
takes on this color.
Example:
[Display Colors]
DisplayBackgroundColor=192,192,192
SymbolFillColor = 0,0,255
SymbolLineColor = 255,255,255
SymbolBackgroundColor = 192,192,192

XYPlot Definition Section


Modify this section to determine the default formatting of an XYPlot.
Autoscale1=yes, 0=no
Value/Description/Plot Title/Grids/Scale Inside Axis/Tag Name/Eng Units/Correlation
Coefficient/Linear Correlation/Connecting Lines1=enable feature, 0=disable feature
Background Null1=sets to have no background color, 0=have background color specified
under Elements
Start Time/End TimeDefault start and end time range (must be a valid Historian string)
UpdateTimeRangeMaximum time period, in seconds, to support updates. The default is
604,800 seconds, equal to 7 days. If the time range is greater than this value, the trend does
not update automatically even when the end time is '*'. Note that the maximum update range
is different from the update rate, which is the frequency with which the computer displays
new data from the server, typically every 5 seconds.
ElementThese 17 entries are the main drawn properties of XYPlots. For each of 17
XYPlot elements, you can change the color and shape properties. This is the entry format:
ElementXName, Color, LineStyle, MarkerStyle

222

PROCBOOK.INI

ColorDecimal conversion of the color to draw the element.


LineStyleLine style of the element. Key is as follows: -1=no line, 0=solid, 1=dashed,
2=dotted, 3=dash-dot, 4=dash-dot-dot
MarkerStyleMarker style of each XY pair. Key is as follows: -1=no marker, 0=closed
circle, 1=open circle, 2=closed diamond, 3=open diamond, 4=closed square, 5=open square,
6=closed triangle, 7=open triangle, 8=cross

Macro Protection
The primary purpose of the macro protection feature is to prevent misbehaved VBA event
code from executing. Whenever a ProcessBook display (either standalone .pdi file or table
of contents entry) is opened, ProcessBook determines whether the display has any VBA code
present.
MacroProtectionLevel may be set in the [STARTUP] section of Procbook.ini at one
of the following levels:
Value

Description

Display is opened with macros enabled.

User is prompted when display is opened; project is set to design mode if user selects
<Disable Macros>.

User is prompted when display is opened; project is opened with macros disabled if user
selects <Disable Macros>.

User is prompted when display is opened; project is always set to design mode when
opened.

User is prompted when display is opened; project is always opened with macros
disabled.

The default value for this setting is 0, so that if it is not present at all in the .ini file, then
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook always executes macros.

View Only Mode


Installations of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook can be configured so that users on a
network may only view ProcessBooks and not change them. The user has access to the
Standard toolbar, including the Trend Display feature, but cannot save an ad hoc display.
To put FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook into view-only mode, add the line
ProcessBook=Primary

to the Startup section of your ProcBook.ini file.


Alternatively, if you use Windows Authentication security, you could set the file permissions
to read-only for those users who should not modify ProcessBooks. Those users could make a
copy of the file locally and modify it.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

223

System Administrator Notes

INI Security
You can use your system registry to override many strings or integer values in
PROCBOOK.INI:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\PISystem\PI - ProcessBook\Security

Under this key there is a key for the INI file section where you can override values. Many
string or integer INI setting can be overwritten this way. The only exceptions are the HA
Collective setting, which cannot be overridden. For example, to override the
EnableScreenSaver setting in the STARTUP section of PROCBOOK.INI, create a DWORD
value EnableScreenSaver with a value of 1 in HKLM\SOFTWARE\PISystem\PI ProcessBook\Security\Startup.
Security registry settings override local PROCBOOK.INI settings. Moreover, local
PROCBOOK.INI settings override global PROCBOOK.INI settings.
The FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook setup kit does not create these registry keys; it is up
to each site administrator to create the keys if they want to override the PROCBOOK.INI
settings. These registry keys allow a FactoryTalk Historian System administrator to lock
down a system configuration so that users cannot make changes.

IMPPIGP.INI
The IMPPIGP.INI file contains configuration settings used by the Import utility in
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook. The file generally resides in the PIPC\DAT directory.
As with other .INI files, SETUP.EXE creates this file with default settings.
When you import VAX-formatted graphics and graphics that include trends, the import utility
uses the settings found in this .INI file to convert items such as color, line style, and fonts.
You can edit the .INI file if you want to change these default settings. Before you edit this
file, you should make a backup copy so you can restore FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
to its original settings.
Note: The settings in this .INI file affect graphics and trends included in graphics only.
When importing trend displays, the format specified in the Trend Preference
setting is used.

The following is a list of the keywords in the IMPPIGP.INI file. The values shown are
examples and not necessarily the default settings shipped with FactoryTalk Historian
ProcessBook:
The Color section of the .INI file maps VAX colors to FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
colors:
[Color]
Clear=0,0,0
Black=0,0,0
White=255,255,255
Red=255,0,0
Green=0,255,0

224

IMPPIGP.INI

Blue=0,0,255
Cyan=0,255,255
Magenta=255,0,255
Yellow=255,255,0
Orange=255,128,0
GreenYellow=128,255,0
GreenCyan=0,255,128
BlueCyan=0,128,128
BlueMagenta=0,0,128
RedMagenta=255,0,128
DarkGray=128,128,128
LightGray=192,192,192

The values shown to the right of the equal sign are the red, green, blue values. Refer to
Creating Your Own Colors in the Windows documentation for more information on
changing these values.
The Line Style section maps the VAX line format to the FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
line format:
[Line Style]
Supress=5
Solid=0
XShortDash=2
DotShortDash=3
LongDash=1
XLongDash=1
TwoDotDash=4
LongDotDash=3
ShortDash=1

The FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook values to the right of the equal sign represent:
0
1
2
3
4
5

=
=
=
=
=
=

solid
dash
dot
dash dot
dash dot dot
suppress

The Font section maps the VAX supported fonts to FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook
fonts:
StandardFont=35,400,0,0,34,Arial
SmallVector=-29,400,0,0,34,Arial
MediumVector=-52,400,0,0,34,Arial
LargeVector=-77,400,0,0,34,Arial
Note: These default values are based on resolutions for VT340 terminals. If you are
using a terminal other than these, appearances may be different.

The values to the right of the equal sign represent these font characteristics.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

225

System Administrator Notes

Position

Font
Characteristic

Definition

Height

Specifies the height of the font. If the value is greater than zero,
it specifies the cell height. If the value is less than zero, it
specifies the character height, which is the cell height minus the
leading.

Weight

Specifies the weight of the font (for example, light, medium,


bold). Values can be from 0 to 900 in increments of 100. 100
equals the lightest; 900 the darkest.

Italic

Specifies an italic font if the value is not zero (for example, 0 =


non-italic; 1 = italic).

Underline

Specifies an underlined font if the value is not zero (for example,


0 = non-underlined; 1 = underlined).

Pitch and Family

Specifies the pitch and family of the font. Pitch can be fixed,
variable, or default. Font families, such as Old English, describe
the look of a font in a general way. They are intended for
specifying fonts when the exact typeface desired is not available.

Face Name

Specifies the typeface name of the font.

The Marker section of the .INI file maps the VAX trend markers to the markers provided
in FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook:
[Markers]
NoMarker=9
Dot=0
SmallPlus=6
LargePlus=7
Asterisk=0
Circle=1
LargeX=8
Box=5
Diamond=3
BoxWithDot=4
DiamondWithDot=2
BoxWithDiamond=4

The values to the right of the equal sign represent these marker types in FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

filled circle
open circle
filled diamond
open diamond
filled square
open square
filled triangle
open triangle
cross
none

The Display section in the .INI file specifies the supported terminals in FactoryTalk
Historian ProcessBook:
[Display]
Terminal Type=VT340

226

SETUPProcessBook.LOG

Keywords for supported terminals are shown below. The horizontal and vertical dimensions
are also shown.
VT340 = 800 x 500
Reflection = 800 x 500
Tektronix = 4095 x 3130
X1024 = 880 x 640
X800 = 560 x 448

If your terminal is not included in the list of keywords, you can create your own. The syntax
is:
Terminal Type=Custom,X,Y

where X equals the horizontal dimension and Y equals the vertical dimension.

SETUPProcessBook.LOG
This log tracks the setup of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook on your system and holds
information pertaining to directory structure, user-entered information for Node, .DLL, and
User name, and the installation of the various ProcessBook files.

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

227

Appendix C

Troubleshooting Tips
Display Can't Find Data
When a display does not receive data, the problem may be one of the following:

The network is down.

A display has been moved from one PC to another and Node Identifiers to the Server(s)
need to be re-established through the Connections dialog box (page 4).

An ODBC Data Source may have been altered, causing the dataset to fail to return data.

An ODBC database might have been restructured, invalidating your dataset.

Trend Cursor Does Not Appear


If the trend is part of a display, select it. If that doesn't enable the Trend Cursor (page 81), the
trend is probably too small. Double-click to make the trend larger.

Trend Legend Does Not Appear


Make the trend larger. If that doesn't help, check the default Trend Format settings.

Cant Change or Save a Display


If your FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook is part of a View-only installation, you are unable
to save any ad hoc trends or alter displays or ProcessBooks.
If you cannot alter a display or ProcessBook, you may be in either View mode or Run mode.
If you are in View mode, you have only one toolbar. If you are in Run mode, the Run mode
button

on the Drawing toolbar is depressed. Switch to Build mode

Is an XYPlot Updating?
When an XYPlot is updating, the updating tags are shown with an arrow indicator in the
legend. An XYPlot is updating if the following conditions exist:
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

229

Troubleshooting Tips

The end time for the X tag is indicated as the current time (by using *) or is in the future
(*+N)

At least one of the Y tag end times is indicated as the current time (by using *) or is in the
future (*+N) and is not synchronized or matched with the X tag (if X is not updating).

If both the X tag and the Y tag are updating, an arrow indicator is shown in each legend entry.
Updates for retrieval methods Recorded and Interpolated are received from an event pipe that
provides the application with snapshot values. For this reason, when a tag is using recorded
values, you may see many more values while the plot is updating than are actually recorded.
Once the plot is regenerated or reverted, only recorded values are shown. When using the
interpolated retrieval method, values on the plot are interpolated using the snapshots coming
in through the event pipe.

Is an OLE Object in a Display Linked or Embedded?


To determine if an object is linked or embedded, look at the border around it. Linked objects
are surrounded with dashed lines; embedded objects are surrounded with solid lines.
Depending on the colors used, sometimes the border of an object is difficult to see. If so,
select the object and click on the Edit menu. The last entry in the menu appears as:
xx object for embedded objects
or
Linked xx object for linked objects
where xx is the object type, such as document, spreadsheet, etc.

Linked Object Data Isn't Updating


If your linked data doesn't update when you open a display, click Edit > Links.

If the Edit > Links choice is unavailable, the link is permanently broken and your object
has become a picture. It can't update from the source. Re-create the object.

On the Links dialog box, if the file is set to Manual Update, click Update Now, and the
file should update.

On the Links dialog box, if the entry for the file says Unavail, the source file is not
where the application expects to find it. Use the Change Source button to locate the file
and re-establish a path for the link.

Missing ODBC Trace


If no values are found for one of the selected columns in a query, the trace will not be drawn
and the value in the legend reads No Data.

230

Missing ODBC Data Sources

If the necessary time value is not defined in the query, either by a date/time column or by a
placeholder tag, the trace is drawn as a straight line using one value.

Missing ODBC Data Sources


Occasionally, an ODBC data source cannot be found. This can occur because the data source
was deleted or because the ProcessBook .piw file has been moved to a machine that does
not have the same data source defined.
To resolve the problem, re-define the data source. The following figure shows what happens
when a Trend attempts to display a trace for which the data source no longer exists.

Trend Display after a Data Set failure

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

231

Appendix D

Index
.
.piw 37

A
ActiveX Control 191
Ad Hoc Trend 87, 88
Create 88
Save 88
Add-In Manager 8
Add-Ins 8
Aligning Multiple Symbols 135
Annotations 127, 129
Add 129
Arc command 120
Assign Layers dialog 68
Attributes
Changing 54
Color 55, 56
Font 55
Line 57
Autorange 84

B
Background color 56
Bar 112
Create a bar 112
Book View 31, 32, 33, 34
Preferences 16
Section of Procbook.ini file 214
Browser Toolbar 10, 11
Build Mode 7
Button
Adding a Button 111

C
Call Tracing 183
Cascade 47
Circle 120
Close

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

a ProcessBook 37
Color 17, 55, 56, 77, 224
of plot elements 77
Pen 20
section of the imppign.ini file 224
Trend Element Preferences tab 20
COM object 169
Compound Documents 191
Configuring the Data Source 162, 179, 184
Connection Points 136, 137
Add 138
Delete 138
Connections 136, 137
Connectors Dialog 141
Failure 5
Connector Symbols 136
Container 191
Continuous trace 86
Convert 199
VAX-formatted trends and graphics 89
Copy 36
a data set to another ProcessBook 176
Correlation
Correlation Coefficient for XY Plot 101
Cursors 81, 82
Missing 229
Custom Data Sets 169
Custom Menus 9
Custom Toolbars 9

D
Data
Data Manager in Procbook.ini file 214
Not in Display 229
Data Set 162, 167, 172, 174, 175, 176
Adding to a column 172
Adding to Bars or Values in a Display 174
Copying a 176
Custom 169
Edit a 175
Is it in Use? 171
ODBC 167
233

Index

Running in ProcessBook 174


Data Source 167, 179, 180
Configuring the 181, 184
Definition of 167
Delete a 184
Edit a 184
Default
Preference settings 14
Trend Format 75
Delete 37, 75, 176, 184, 203
a Data Set 176
a Plot within a Trend 75
an Entry 37
an ODBC Data Source 184
an ODBC Driver 184
an OLE Object 203
Deselect a Symbol 132
Design Mode, VBA 205
Details Window 127, 128
Open 128
Digital values 108
Disabling macros 223
Discrete trace 86
Display 6, 45
as an Embedded Object 194
Can't Find Data 229
Connection Failure 5
Data sources for 3
Elements of 92, 96, 97
Manage multiple displays 47
Point Attributes 155
Reducing to Icon 49
Resizing 47
Saving 49
Display Entry 26
Linked Display Entry 27
Text or Display 27
Displaying an Item's Definition 144
Drag and Drop Embedding 201
Draw 52, 53, 91, 120, 121, 122
Drawing Area 53
Drawing Grid 53
Drawing Tools 52
Free-form Objects 121
Line 120
Polylines 122
Rectangle, Square, Arc, Ellipse, or Circle 120
XYPlot 91
Driver Manager 179
Dynamic Symbol 45, 71, 112, 116, 144, 196

234

Bar 112
Button 110
definition of 144
Multi-State symbol 116
Status of 145
Trend 71
Value 108
XYPlot 90

E
Edit 175, 184, 201
a Data Set 175
a text box 119
an ODBC Data Source 184
Element Relative Displays 158
Migrate from Module Relative Display 211
Ellipse 120
Embed 194
Example of 198
Existing ProcessBook Display in Another OLE
Application 194
ProcessBook Display in Another OLE
Application 194
vs. Link 198
Entries 26, 31, 36
Arranging 31
Change the Name of 34, 36
Creating 26
Placement in ProcessBook 26
Rearranging 36
Types of 34
ERD 209
Expanding a Trend 81

F
File
How to Import 41
Sharing 42
Flags for Data 146
Flip command 134
Floating Point values 108
Font 55
Font section of the imppign.ini file 224
Format 54, 55, 56, 57
Color 55, 56
Editable Formatting Attributes 54
Font 55
Line 57
Trend 75, 76, 77, 78
Formatting Paintbrush 57

Full Screen 48
Full Timestamp 85
Future Trends 66

G
Graphics 89, 123
Convert from VAX to PC 89
Graphic Symbol 123
Icons vs. Graphics 199
Grid 53
Grid Lines 83
Size 53
Group Symbols 136

H
Handles 132, 133
Horizontal flip 134
How Trends Refresh 82

I
Icons 49
Graphics vs. Icons 199
impg32.dll 214
Import 41, 89
Files 41
VAX-formatted trends and graphics 89
imppigp.ini 224
Independent Display files 47
Saving 49
Integers 108
Interpolated data retrieval method 91, 92
Interval 91, 92
Invisible line on a trend 20
Item Definition 144, 145

Line 20, 57, 77, 119, 120, 224


Draw 120
Ends 57
Style 19, 20, 57, 77
Weight 57, 77
Linear Correlation Line 96
Linear Regression by Least Squares Method 101
Link 195, 196, 197, 198
Existing File into a ProcessBook Display 195
ProcessBook to Another Application 197
Re-establishing 197
vs. Embed 198
Linked Displays or ProcessBooks 27
Add 28
Logarithmic scales 72, 84

M
Macros 205, 223
Markers 19, 87
Shapes 20
Menu 9
Minimize 47
Missing Data Sources 179, 231
Missing Trace 230
Mode, Run and Build 7
Move 29, 42, 69, 75
a Display to another PI Server 69
a Plot 75
a ProcessBook to another PC 42
MRD 209
MSQuery 182
Multiple Objects 133, 134, 135, 136
Align Multiple Symbols 135
How to Select 133
Stacking Order 134
Ungroup 136
Multi-State Symbol 116, 117

Keyboard Shortcuts 13, 14

N
L
Layers 51, 66, 67, 68, 69
Adding a Layer 67
Assign symbol to 68
Composite symbols 69
Working with 66
Z Order 67
Layout tab 74, 78
Legend 91, 92, 96, 97
Level of an Entry 34
FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

Name 25, 34, 67


a ProcessBook 25
of a layer 67
Network Connections 3, 4, 5, 6
Network Errors 5
New 7
ProcessBook 25
NUM 51

235

Index

O
ODBC 167, 179, 180, 181, 182, 183, 184, 230, 231
Data Access 179
Data Sets 167
Data Sources 179, 184
Driver Manager 179
Drivers 179, 184
Preparing to Use 181
Troubleshooting 230, 231
OLE 191, 192, 194, 195, 197, 198, 201, 202, 203,
230
Edit 194, 196, 197, 201, 202
Embed 192, 193
Link 195, 196, 197
Overview 191, 192, 195, 198
Troubleshooting 230
Open 37, 46, 47
a Display 46
Independent Display Files 47
Multiple entries 47
ProcessBook 37
Several Displays at Once 47
OpenVMS Trends and Graphics 89
Organizing Symbols 52, 53, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136
Out of Range Indicators 106
Outline View 34, 35, 36

P
Pages 33
Turning in Book View 33
Partial Timestamp 85
PI Data Archive 153
PI ProcessBook 1, 3
PI Server 3, 4, 5, 6, 153
Connect/Disconnect 4
Updates to 153
Pisysdat 213
Placeholders 169, 170
Playback 58, 61, 62
Plot 72, 74, 75, 92
Plot Title 91, 92
Point 71, 155
Polygon 121
Preference Settings 14, 15, 16, 17, 19, 20
General Preferences 15
Trend 19
Trend Elements 20
Preserve aspect ratio 47
Print 21, 22, 23
Procbook.ini 214
236

ProcessBook 6, 25, 26, 31, 37, 38, 41, 42


Basic Steps to Build a 25
Book View 32, 33, 34
Entries 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31
File Sharing Capability 42
Import Files to 41
Open 37, 38
Outline View 34, 35, 36
Overview 6
Properties Dialog 38, 40
Save and close 37
Properties 38, 126
of a ProcessBook or Display 38, 40
of Symbols in the Symbols Library 126

Q
Queries 170, 182
Questionable Data Flag 146

R
Rectangle 120
How to Draw 120
Re-establishing Links 197
Refresh Interval 82, 167, 174
Refresh Timer section of Procbook.ini file 214
Regrouping a Composite Symbol 136
Relative paths 196
Relative Timestamp 85
Remove
a Trend Cursor 82
an Entry 37
Reset 64
Resize 33, 47
a Display 47
a ProcessBook Window 33
Retain Aspect Ratio 214
Rotate a Symbol 133
Run 46
Entry 46

S
Save 37, 49, 88
Ad Hoc Trend Display 88
ProcessBook 37
ProcessBook Displays 49
Scripting 205, 206
SCRL 51
Scrollbars 51, 64, 65, 66, 82
Search 48

for a Specific Display 48


Selection handles 52, 75, 127, 133, 136
Server 3, 4, 5, 6
Connect to a 4
Server Time 51
Client Time 51
Setup procedure 23, 214, 227
setup.exe 214
setup.log 227
Single Scale for the Vertical Axis 84
Snap to grid 53
Span 84
Square 120
How to Draw 120
Stacking Order 134
Starting PI ProcessBook 3
Startup section of Procbook.ini 214
Static Symbols 45
Status Indicator Toolbar 51
Status Report 145
Stored Procedures in Queries 182
Substituted Data Flag 146
Summary Information 38
Symbol Attachments
Dialog Box 140
Symbol Library 214
Symbols 45, 108, 118, 125, 127
Connect 136, 139
Delete 134
Details and Annotations 127, 128, 129
Dynamic 45
Flip 134
Rotate 133
Select 132, 133
Stacking 134
Static 45
System Administration 207, 213, 214, 224, 227

T
Tags 155
Text Symbol 118, 119
Tile Windows 47
Time 64, 65, 66
Time Forward and Back 66
Time Range Toolbar 64
Time range 64, 65, 66
Changing 64
Revert 64
Toolbar 64

FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook User Guide

Timestamp 85
Title
of a trend 83
of ProcessBook or Display 38
Too Many Points 106
Toolbars 9, 10
Add Buttons to 10
Customize 9
ToolTips 17, 58
Trace 77, 86, 87, 183
Definition of 86
Hiding 86
Markers 87
Missing 230
Trace ODBC Calls 183
Trend 19, 20, 71, 72, 75, 80, 81, 82, 83, 87, 88, 89,
172, 219, 229
Ad Hoc 87, 88
Analysis tools 80
Cursors 81, 229
Data Sets in 172
Default Format 75
Default Preferences 19
Definition section of procbook.ini 214
Delete a Plot 75
Expand 81
Formatting a 75
Grid Lines and Labels 83
Horizontal Scale Grid Lines 85
Importing VAX-Formatted 89
Invalid data 5
Multiple Plots 74
Preferences 19
Refresh rate for data 82
Refreshing data from a data set 174
Tool 74, 88
Zoom 2x In or Out 80
Trend Scale Grid Lines 85
formatting 77
Troubleshooting 227, 229, 230
Cant save a display 229
Display Has No Data 229
Legend Missing on Trend 229
Setup.log 227
Trend Cursors Missing 229
Troubleshooting Icon 51
Updating Linked Objects 230

237

Index

U
Ungroup Symbols 136
UOM 177
Updates 196, 230
Break Links 196
by Exception 153
for Future Trends 66
for Trend data 82
Links 196
to Linked Objects 196
to PI Data 153
Troubleshooting 230

V
Value 108
Value Scale 19, 72, 84, 85
VAX 41, 89, 218, 224
VBA 3, 205, 206
View Only Mode 223
Views 31, 32, 34
Book 32
Outline 34
Visible Layer 66, 67
VMS 89

W
Workspace 6

X
XY Plot 90, 91, 92, 96, 97, 99, 101, 102, 105, 106
Change Time Range 104
Draw 91
Examples 106, 107, 108
Interpreting 102
Legend 91, 92, 96, 97
Plot Format Tab 91, 92, 97
Plot Title 91, 92

Z
Zoom 47, 80, 103
2x 80
Display Size 47

238

Appendix A

Technical Support and Resources


Rockwell provides dedicated technical support internationally, 24
hours a day, 7 days a week.
You can read complete information about technical support
options, and access all of the following resources at the Rockwell
Automation Support Web site
(http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/).

Before You Call or Write for


Help

When you contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support, please


provide:
Product name, version, and/or build numbers.
Computer platform (CPU type, operating system, and version
number).
The time that the difficulty started.
The message log(s) at that time. Consult your product
documentation on the location of the message log files.

Find the Version and Build


Numbers

You can find the version and build numbers of FactoryTalk


Historian client in the About dialog box, available from the Help
menu of the application.

View Computer Platform


Information

To view platform specifications, right-click My Computer and


select Properties. For more detailed information, choose Start >
Run, and type msinfo32.exe.

Rockwell Automation Support


Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products. At
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/, you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs,
technical and application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that
you can customize to make the best use of these tools.
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting, we offer
TechConnect support programs. For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation
representative, or visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/.

Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in
this manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada
Outside United States or
Canada

1.440.646.3434
Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/americas/phone_en.html, or contact your
local Rockwell Automation representative.

New Product Satisfaction Return


Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the
manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these
procedures.
United States
Outside United States

Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain
one) to your distributor to complete the return process.
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to
improve this document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.

Rockwell Automation Publication HSEPB-UM025A-EN-EDecember 2013


Supersedes Publication HSEPB-UM024A-EN-EJune 2012

Copyright 2013 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

You might also like